(Practice Makes Perfect) Robin Torres-Gouzerh - Practice Makes Perfect - Intermediate English Grammar For ESL Learners-McGraw-Hill Education (2019) PDF

PRACTICE
MAKES
PERFECT
®
New York Chicago San Francisco Lisbon London Madrid Mexico City
Milan New Delhi San Juan Seoul Singapore Sydney Toronto
00_FM.indd 1 2/8/19 9:51 AM

This page intentionally left blank
00_FM.indd 2 2/8/19 9:51 AM

PRACTICE
MAKES
PERFECT
®
Third Edition
Robin Torres-Gouzerh
New York Chicago San Francisco Athens London Madrid

Mexico City Milan New Delhi Singapore Sydney Toronto
New York Chicago San Francisco Lisbon London Madrid Mexico City
Milan New Delhi San Juan Seoul Singapore Sydney Toronto
00_FM.indd 3 2/8/19 9:51 AM

Copyright © 2019 by McGraw-Hill Education. All rights reserved. Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this
publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written permis-
sion of the publisher.
ISBN: 978-1-26-045346-1
MHID: 1-26-045346-4
The material in this eBook also appears in the print version of this title: ISBN: 978-1-26-045345-4,
MHID: 1-26-045345-6.
eBook conversion by codeMantra

Version 1.0
All trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners. Rather than put a trademark symbol after every occurrence of a trademarked name, we use
names in an editorial fashion only, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement of the trademark. Where such designa-
tions appear in this book, they have been printed with initial caps.
McGraw-Hill Education eBooks are available at special quantity discounts to use as premiums and sales promotions or for use in corporate training
programs. To contact a representative, please visit the Contact Us page at www.mhprofessional.com.
Trademarks: McGraw-Hill Education, the McGraw-Hill Education Publishing logo, Practice Makes Perfect, and related trade dress are trademarks
or registered trademarks of McGraw-Hill Education and/or its affiliates in the United States and other countries and may not be used without written
permission. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. McGraw-Hill Education is not associated with any product or vendor
mentioned in this book.
Extra Exercise Questions
Additional review exercises that support this book can be found in the McGraw-Hill Education Language Lab App. Go to www.mhlanguagelab.com for
details on how to access this free app, which is available for Apple and Android tablet and mobile devices, as well as for computer via web browser.
TERMS OF USE
This is a copyrighted work and McGraw-Hill Education and its licensors reserve all rights in and to the work. Use of this work is subject to these terms.
Except as permitted under the Copyright Act of 1976 and the right to store and retrieve one copy of the work, you may not decompile, disassemble,
reverse engineer, reproduce, modify, create derivative works based upon, transmit, distribute, disseminate, sell, publish or sublicense the work or any
part of it without McGraw-Hill Education’s prior consent. You may use the work for your own noncommercial and personal use; any other use of the
work is strictly prohibited. Your right to use the work may be terminated if you fail to comply with these terms.
THE WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” McGRAW-HILL EDUCATION AND ITS LICENSORS MAKE NO GUARANTEES OR WARRANTIES
AS TO THE ACCURACY, ADEQUACY OR COMPLETENESS OF OR RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM USING THE WORK, INCLUD-
ING ANY INFORMATION THAT CAN BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE WORK VIA HYPERLINK OR OTHERWISE, AND EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-
ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. McGraw-Hill Education and its licensors do not warrant or guarantee that the functions
contained in the work will meet your requirements or that its operation will be uninterrupted or error free. Neither McGraw-Hill Education nor its
licensors shall be liable to you or anyone else for any inaccuracy, error or omission, regardless of cause, in the work or for any damages resulting
therefrom. McGraw-Hill Education has no responsibility for the content of any information accessed through the work. Under no circumstances shall
McGraw-Hill Education and/or its licensors be liable for any indirect, incidental, special, punitive, consequential or similar damages that result from
the use of or inability to use the work, even if any of them has been advised of the possibility of such damages. This limitation of liability shall apply
to any claim or cause whatsoever whether such claim or cause arises in contract, tort or otherwise.
Contents
Preface ix
1 The sentence 1
Noun phrases 2
Verb phrases 2
Modifiers 3
2 The verb phrase 5

Auxiliary verbs 6
3 The verb 9
Linking verbs 9
Irregular verbs 10
Tenses 11
4 The progressive tenses 14

The present progressive 14
The past progressive 14
The future progressive 16
5 The perfect tenses 20

The present perfect 20
The past perfect 25
The future perfect 27
6 Modal auxiliaries 33
Shades of meaning 36
Special auxiliaries 41
7 The progressive forms of modal auxiliaries 43
8 The auxiliary verb do 48

Using do in questions 48
Using do in negative sentences 49
00_FM.indd 5 2/8/19 9:51 AM

9 The passive voice 52
Using the passive 53
10 The passive form of modal auxiliaries 58

The future tense 58
The past tense 58
11 The stative passive 61

Adjectives and participles 61
The progressive form vs. the stative passive 63
Prepositions 65
12 Past participles with get 67
13 Participial adjectives 70
Present participles 70
Past participles 70
14 Subject-verb agreement 74
Third-person singular and plural 74
The verb be 76
Expressions of quantity 77
Collective nouns 79
Auxiliary verbs 81
Complex sentences 82
15 Agreement with nouns 84

Personal pronouns and collective nouns 84
Indefinite pronouns 87
Complex nouns 89
16 Using other 90
Adjectives 90
Pronouns 91
17 Gerunds 94
Distinguishing gerunds from present participles 95
The possessive 95
18 Conjunctions 97
Coordinating conjunctions 97
Conjunctions and their meaning 98
Correlative conjunctions 100
Subordinating conjunctions 104
Adverbs that act as conjunctions 108
vi Contents
00_FM.indd 6 2/8/19 9:51 AM

19 Prepositions 110
Compound prepositions 110
Noun and pronoun objects 112
More than one prepositional phrase 114
20 Adjectives and adverbs 115

Adjectives 115
Adverbs 115
21 Filler subjects and impersonal subjects 120

Filler subjects 120
Impersonal subjects 121
22 Clauses 124
Independent clauses 124
Dependent clauses 124
Relative clauses 125
23 Punctuation 149
The period 149
The comma 150
The semicolon 152
The colon 154
The question mark 155
The exclamation point 155
The apostrophe 156
Quotation marks 158
The hyphen and the dash 159
Parentheses and brackets 160
24 Capitalization, numbers, and italics 162

Capitalization 162
Numbers 166
Italics 168
appendix Review exercises 170
Answer key 210
vii
Contents
00_FM.indd 7 2/8/19 9:51 AM

00_FM.indd 8 2/8/19 9:51 AM

Preface
Grammar can be frustrating to master as you try to learn a language. This book was
written to be easily accessible to students of English as a second language. Practice
Makes Perfect: Intermediate English Grammar for ESL Learners is designed to help be-
ginner- and intermediate-level learners hone their grammatical skills to the point
where they are comfortable with English grammar. Technical terminology has been
kept to a minimum, and simple terms are used wherever possible. As a result, you will
be able to focus on learning new material.
You have already begun your study of English grammar. This book will provide
you with a higher-level look at that grammar. The numerous examples provide models
on which you can rely to form your own original sentences. The many practical exer-
cises give you the opportunity to practice what you have learned. Be sure to use the
answer key to check your work. And this second edition is supported by additional
review questions in the McGraw-Hill Education Language Lab app.
As you progress through this book, you will find that your confidence in using
English is growing, and by the time you finish the book, you will be one major step
closer to being a fluent speaker and writer.
ix

00_FM.indd 9 2/8/19 9:51 AM

00_FM.indd 10 2/8/19 9:51 AM

The sentence ·1·
In formal spoken or written English, every sentence must be complete. The basic
rule is that all sentences must have a subject (S), which can be a pronoun, a
noun, or a noun phrase, and a verb (V), which can also be a verb phrase. In many
cases, the verb can be followed by a direct object (O). Consider the following
examples.
She works. (S) ⫹ (V)
Fish swim. (S) ⫹ (V)
The children played. (S) ⫹ (V)
The bus driver needs a break. (S) ⫹ (V) ⫹ (O)
My mother liked the movie. (S) ⫹ (V) ⫹ (O)
Every sentence must have a subject. The imperative sentence is an exception
to this basic rule, because the subject, you, is understood. Imperative sentences are
used to instruct someone to do something.
Go to class.
Pick up your mess, please.
Read objective newspapers.
Verbs that do not require a direct object are called intransitive verbs. Some
common intransitive verbs are exist and rise. They are typically used with preposi-
tional phrases, as illustrated in the following examples.
It is possible that life existed on Mars millions of years ago.
Black smoke rose from the burning tires.
EXERCISE
1·1
Rewrite each verb phrase as a complete sentence by adding a subject.
EXAMPLE Is a real bargain. That coat is a real bargain.
1. Were eating an Italian specialty.
2. Have worked in Austin for two years.
3. Purchased it last week.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 1 2/25/08 10:56:01 AM

4. Is awful.
5. Looks comfortable.
6. Went to the theater.
Noun phrases
The subject of a sentence can be a noun phrase, which can be simple or complex. The subject can
be one word or a group of words that includes a noun together with other words that provide
information about the noun. Some noun phrases can be quite complex. Consider the following
sentences.
The boy went to the playground.
The lively boy went to the playground.
The lively boy next door went to the playground.
No matter how complex a noun phrase is, it still remains the subject of the sentence and
determines the form of the verb. The verb in the sentences above is went.
EXERCISE
1·2
Underline the subject(s) in each sentence.
1. Children ought to be more careful.

2. Water is good for you.
3. Prague is an amazing and historic Eastern European city.
4. The furry, clean, calm cat slept on the couch.
5. The furry, clean, calm, black cat ran outside.
6. The furry, clean, calm, black cat with a scar jumped on the counter.
7. The big, ugly, dirty, brown bear with long ears and large claws attacked a hunter.
8. She read a magazine yesterday.
9. Peter went to the circus.
10. Lending money and giving too much advice can cause problems.
Verb phrases
The verb in a sentence can also appear in a verb phrase.
He has often spoken of you.
She will not be able to understand this document.
2 practice makes perfect Intermediate English Grammar for ESL Learners
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 2 2/25/08 10:56:02 AM

Sometimes extra information is added before the subject and verb, or between the subject
and the verb. This information is often adverbial. In the first example below, the adverbial phrases
tell where, how frequently, and when the action took place. In the second example, the adverbial
phrase tells why and when the action took place.
In Pennsylvania, Marc often went running in the morning.
Marc, because he was feeling unhealthy, went running in the morning.
In both of these examples, when we ask the question “Who went running?” the answer is “Marc”—
the subject of both sentences. The added information is that he often ran in the morning when he
was in Pennsylvania, and that he ran because he felt unhealthy.
EXERCISE
1·3
Underline both the subject and the verb or verb phrase in each sentence.
1. The big, brown dog sitting in the shade is hungry.

2. I always drink coffee in the morning before work.
3. After getting to the hotel room, Saul ordered room service.
4. The youth hostels we stayed in while we were in Budapest weren’t too expensive.
5. My professor, after noticing that I had been studying hard, was nicer to me.
6. Maybe her father is sicker than you think.
7. In the future, presidential elections will be held on the Internet.
8. After the show, the people who were sitting in the front row got up.
Modifiers
There are many types of sentence modifiers. Among the most important are adjectives, adverbs,
and prepositional phrases.
Adjectives modify nouns or pronouns.
That striped snake is poisonous.
Our new neighbor is a professional basketball player.
He is old.
Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs.
She seldom wrote after she moved away.
The severely wounded man was taken to the hospital.
The witness spoke very nervously about the robbery.
Prepositional phrases can modify nouns or verbs.
The man in the garden is a police officer.
For many years they lived in Mexico.
unit 1 The sentence 3
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 3 2/25/08 10:56:02 AM

EXERCISE
1·4
Complete each sentence with an appropriate modifier: adjective, adverb,
or prepositional phrase.
EXAMPLE They stayed up and chatted until dawn .
1. he headed for home on foot.

2. Do you recognize the man on the corner?
3. She speaks to me anymore.
4. I was at Macy’s hoping to buy a
dress.
5. He took her advice very .
6. , we go skiing in Colorado.
7. Your brother plays the piano .
8. Please speak . I’m trying to nap.
9. Yesterday, I saw a accident .
10. My sister is a competent lawyer.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 4 2/25/08 10:56:02 AM

The verb phrase · 2·
It is impossible to compose a correct sentence without using a proper verb. The

verb is at the very foundation of a sentence. The verb phrase may be composed of
only one word or it may have related parts. Consider the following examples.
Angela had to go to Chicago.
The boys are fishing at the creek.
Someone should repair that window.
Sometimes, the related parts are composed of more than one word. In the exam-
ples above, the verbs are go, fish, and repair, and the related parts are had to, are,
and should.
EXERCISE
2·1
Underline the verb phrase in each sentence, whether the verb phrase
is composed of a verb alone or a verb and related parts.
1. He doesn’t go to meetings on Tuesdays.

2. He goes to the park with his dog.
3. She is heading out to school.
4. He never washes the dishes.
5. She is going to the theater tonight.
6. He has traveled to Spain before.
7. She has been practicing yoga for two years now.
8. He has to be at the train station by 8 A.M.
9. She goes to school in Chicago.
10. She had visited Chicago many times.
11. She is going to travel to Chicago.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 5 2/25/08 10:56:02 AM

Auxiliary verbs
Some sentences contain a single verb (for example, go), while other sentences include a related
part before the main verb (for example, a form of be ⫹ a form of the verb go). Auxiliary verbs are
among the related parts that can form a verb phrase; in some grammar books, they are called
“helping verbs.” The second example below illustrates the verb be used as an auxiliary.
She goes to class.
She is going to class.
The first sentence contains a form of the single verb go. In the second example, however, the sen-
tence also contains the verb go, but this time it has a related part, the auxiliary verb is, which pre-
cedes the verb in its present participle form (is going).
Auxiliary verbs change how a verb is used. Such changes can affect the tense, mood, or even
the meaning of the verb.
The auxiliary be can be used in any tense, and in every tense the main verb is in the form of
a present participle.
PRESENT She is fixing that old clock.
PAST She was fixing that old clock.
PRESENT PERFECT She has been fixing that old clock.
PAST PERFECT She had been fixing that old clock.
FUTURE She will be fixing that old clock.
The auxiliary verb have is used with a past participle to form the present perfect or past per-
fect tense.
She has lived here all her life.
They have been working on the problem all day.
Martin had never seen a kangaroo before.
She had been napping when the fire broke out.
The auxiliary do/did is used with a basic verb to form a question, a negative statement with
not, or an emphatic statement. Do is used in the present tense, and did in the past tense.
Do you understand Arabic?
Did Mr. Keller sell that old car yet?
You don’t have enough money to buy that CD.
You’re wrong. I do have enough money.
But you did not have enough money yesterday.
Modal auxiliaries
Some auxiliary verbs are called modal auxiliaries. They are used with a verb to show the degree
of obligation of the action of the verb. Two important modal auxiliaries are have to and should.
Do you have to play the radio so loud?
Mary has to stay at home today.
Dad, you shouldn’t work so hard in this heat.
Why should I care?
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 6 2/25/08 10:56:03 AM

EXERCISE
2·2
Underline the auxiliary verb in each sentence.
1. He does attend meetings on Tuesdays.

2. He is walking to the park with his dog.
3. She is leaving for summer camp on Sunday.
4. Alberto has gone to Cuba.
5. He has traveled to the south of Spain for years.
6. She should go alone this time.
7. He has to walk faster.
EXERCISE
2·3
Rewrite each sentence three times: (1) with be and a present participle,
(2) in the present perfect tense, and (3) with the modal auxiliary should.
EXAMPLE They speak with a lawyer.

They are speaking with a lawyer.
They have spoken with a lawyer.
They should speak with a lawyer.
1. James tries on a pair of pants.
2. I live on about a hundred dollars a week.
3. Father scolds the children.
unit 2 The verb phrase 7
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 7 2/25/08 10:56:03 AM

4. Does she work hard?
5. The conductor waits on the platform.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 8 2/25/08 10:56:03 AM

The verb · 3·
Verbs are words that express action. They can express tense (the time at which the
action occurred) and voice. The voice can be active (where the subject performs
the action) or passive (where the subject is placed in a passive position in the
sentence).
The most common verb tenses are the present, past, and future. Each of
these tenses has a progressive, habitual, and perfect form.
Linking verbs
A linking verb connects a subject and a subject complement, a word that describes
or clarifies the subject. The most commonly used linking verb is the verb be. Con-
sider the following examples.
Table tennis is fun.
Their grandfather was a war hero.
Other words commonly used as linking verbs are appear, seem, look, feel, sound,
taste, and smell.
You seem a little unhappy today.
That woman looks rather sick.
This sweater feels warm.
Her meatloaf smells great!
Linking verbs are intransitive. They do not have direct objects. Notice that
the verb in each of the following examples is a transitive verb with the direct object
flower.
The little girl smelled the flower.
No one wanted to buy a flower from her.
I only sold one flower today.
To identify the direct object in a sentence, ask what or whom of the verb: What did
the little girl smell? What did no one want to buy? What did I sell today? The answer
to each question is flower, the direct object. Linking verbs never have a direct
object.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 9 2/25/08 10:56:03 AM

EXERCISE
3·1
Complete each sentence with an appropriate linking verb.
1. Her suggestion useful at the time.

2. Barbara very different with her new haircut.
3. From here, clouds fluffy like cotton balls.
4. Chocolate éclairs my favorite pastry.
5. This honey wonderful.
6. That idea crazy to them.
7. Peter told me he sick today.
Most verbs have five forms:

◆ Base form. This is the verb in its original form, the form you find in the dictionary. Run,
study, eat, think, write, fall, open, and ask are verbs in their base form.
◆ Third-person singular form: base form ⫹ -s (or -es). This form is used with he, she, or it
in the present tense. Runs, studies, eats, thinks, writes, falls, opens, and asks are verbs in the
third-person singular form.
◆ Past tense form. This form can be regular or irregular. The regular past tense is the base
form ⫹ -ed. Studied, opened, and asked are verbs in the regular past tense form. There are
fewer irregular verbs in the English language than regular verbs. These verbs are called
irregular, because they do not end with -ed in the past tense. Ran, ate, thought, wrote, and
fell are past tense forms of irregular verbs.
◆ Present participle, or progressive, form: base form ⫹ -ing. Running, studying, eating,
thinking, writing, falling, opening, and asking are verbs in the present participle, or pro-
gressive, form.
◆ Past participle form. This form can be regular or irregular. The regular past participle
form is the base form ⫹ -ed. Studied, opened, and asked are verbs in this form. Irregular
past participles are formed differently, for example, run, eaten, thought, written, and
fallen.
Irregular verbs
Verbs are categorized as irregular when they do not end in -ed in the past tense form. Although
there are fewer irregular verbs than regular verbs, they are also among the most commonly used
verbs.
The following chart illustrates the various forms of some common irregular verbs. This list
is not comprehensive; a complete list can be found in most dictionaries.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 10 2/25/08 10:56:04 AM

THIRD - PERSON PRESENT PAST
BASE FORM SINGULAR PAST TENSE PARTICIPLE PARTICIPLE
cut cuts cut cutting cut

eat eats ate eating eaten
find finds found finding found
go goes went going gone
run runs ran running run
say says said saying said
speak speaks spoke speaking spoken
think thinks thought thinking thought
write writes wrote writing written
The verb be is an exception. Like other verbs, it has a base form (be), a progressive form
(being), and a past participle (been). Yet the present tense of be has three distinct forms: (I) am,
(he/she/it) is, and (we/you/they) are. Moreover, the past tense of be has two distinct forms: (I/he/
she/it) was and (we/you/they) were.
Tenses
Most verbs can be conjugated in the present, past, and future tenses. The present participle, or
progressive form, of a verb is used together with the auxiliary be to show a continuing or incom-
plete action in the various tenses. Consider the verb speak in its progressive form.
PRESENT She is speaking with John.
PAST She was speaking with John.
PRESENT PERFECT She has been speaking with John.
PAST PERFECT She had been speaking with John.
FUTURE She will be speaking with John.
FUTURE PERFECT She will have been speaking with John.
Compare these sentences with the following sentences, which illustrate a completed or habitual
action.
PRESENT She speaks with John.
PAST She spoke with John.
PRESENT PERFECT She has spoken with John.
PAST PERFECT She had spoken with John.
FUTURE She will speak with John.
FUTURE PERFECT She will have spoken with John.
The progressive form of be (being) is used only in the present and past tenses.
PRESENT He is sick. He is being good.
PAST He was sick. He was being good.
PRESENT PERFECT He has been sick. —
PAST PERFECT He had been sick. —
FUTURE He will be sick. —
FUTURE PERFECT He will have been sick. —
unit 3 The verb 11
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 11 2/25/08 10:56:04 AM

EXERCISE
3·2
Rewrite each present-tense sentence using the other five tenses.
1. I study mathematics.
PAST
PRESENT PERFECT
PAST PERFECT
FUTURE
FUTURE PERFECT
2. Tom is going to Iraq.

PAST
PRESENT PERFECT
PAST PERFECT
FUTURE
FUTURE PERFECT
3. Anna comes along.

PAST
PRESENT PERFECT
PAST PERFECT
FUTURE
FUTURE PERFECT
4. They are driving to Arizona.

PAST
PRESENT PERFECT
PAST PERFECT
FUTURE
FUTURE PERFECT
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 12 2/25/08 10:56:05 AM

EXERCISE
3·3
In each sentence, if the verb illustrates habitual action, rewrite the sentence with the
progressive form of the verb. If the verb is the progressive form, rewrite the sentence
to illustrate habitual action. Retain the tense of the original sentence.
1. Why is he running so fast?
2. The boys swam across the river.
3. The hungry campers have eaten the hot dogs.
4. I won’t be going to work today.
5. The old woman was very nice to me.
6. My uncle has sung in a chorus.
7. Will you drive your dad’s new car?
8. I was thinking about you.
9. We had shopped there.
10. We were camping on the side of a hill.
unit 3 The verb 13
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 13 2/25/08 10:56:05 AM

·4· The progressive tenses
Most verbs can form a present participle and be used in the progressive tenses.
These tenses express the idea that an action is in progress during a particular time,
that an action begins before, is in progress during, and continues after a period of
time or after another action begins.
The present progressive

The present progressive tense expresses an action that is taking place at the mo-
ment of speaking and can imply that the action is incomplete.
Lauren is shopping right now. (incomplete action: She is still shopping.)
He is traveling to Germany. (incomplete action: He hasn’t arrived yet.)
The sun is shining brightly. (incomplete action: The sun continues
to shine.)
The girls are walking to the park. (incomplete action: They haven’t
arrived yet.)
Often, the progressive present tense can be used to imply a future tense
meaning.
I am driving home this weekend.
Are you going to college next fall?
The past progressive

The past progressive tense expresses an action that took place in the past but was
in progress for a period of time or was incomplete.
Lauren was shopping all day. (in progress all day)
The boys were fighting over a toy. (in progress for a period of time)
Tim was studying but got tired and took a nap. (incomplete)
They were driving home when they ran out of gas. (incomplete)
It is quite common to add a when clause to statements that show an incom-
plete action or an action in progress that is interrupted.
She was crying when I arrived.
Mom was trying to rest when the phone rang.
We were just sitting down to supper when our neighbor knocked at the door.
Mary was practicing the piano when I dropped by.
14
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 14 2/25/08 10:56:05 AM

EXERCISE
4·1
Complete each sentence with an appropriate when clause.
EXAMPLE She was just getting out of bed when the doorbell rang .
1. I was leaning back in my chair when .

2. Were you standing on the corner when ?
3. Aunt Doris was baking a cake when .
4. We were making up the bed in the spare room when
.
Now, provide an appropriate progressive-tense clause to complete each sentence.
EXAMPLE I was just opening my eyes when I heard Mom come in.
5. when the dog began to bark.

6. when the door slammed shut.
7. when I heard someone call my name.
8. when the road suddenly ended.
9. when a bee stung me.
10. when someone stole my purse.
It is possible to place a past progressive verb in a clause that begins with while in order to
emphasize that the action was in progress when an interruption occurred.
While I was swimming in the pool, I felt sick.
My brother began to cry while I was trying to study.
While you were out jogging, someone broke into the house.
While he was standing at the bus stop, it started to snow.
A when clause and a while clause can be used with the same sentence elements.
While he was standing at the bus stop, it started to snow.
He was standing at the bus stop when it started to snow.
While Father was working in the basement, I fell and broke my arm.
Father was working in the basement when I fell and broke my arm.
The interruption of an action in progress can be another action in progress.
While I was trying to fall asleep in my apartment, the upstairs neighbor was making noise.
She was checking the test results while I was working in the lab.
unit 4 The progressive tenses 15
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 15 2/25/08 10:56:06 AM

EXERCISE
4·2
Change each sentence from a statement containing a when clause to a statement
containing a while clause.
1. They were opening their Christmas gifts when the Christmas tree fell over.
2. Tom was swimming in the pool when his little brother fell in the water.
3. She was speaking with the letter carrier when a taxi pulled up in front of the house.
4. Ms. Howard was lecturing her class when her cell phone rang.
5. The boys were playing checkers on the floor when the cat jumped into the middle
of their game.
The future progressive

The future progressive tense expresses an action in progress or incomplete that will be taking
place at a time in the future.
Lauren will be shopping when I call her.
We will be traveling by car.
Will you be having dinner with us tonight?
The two boys will be sharing a room together.
As with the present and past progressive tenses, the future progressive is used to express an
action in progress that is interrupted.
He will be cooking when we get there.
The children will probably be sleeping when you peek in on them.
When you open your eyes, you will be standing in your new house.
Will you still be working in the garden when I stop by?
Note that, although the clause with the progressive form of the verb is in the future tense, the verb
in the when clause is in the present tense.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 16 2/25/08 10:56:06 AM

She will be preparing breakfast when the flowers arrive.
This difference of tenses also occurs with while clauses: The while clause is in the present tense,
and the main clause is in the future tense.
While you’re out skiing, I’ll be making some lunch.
In some cases, the simple future and the future progressive tenses express very similar
situations or actions, especially when the future action takes place at an indefinite time
in the future. In the following examples, note that both sentences express an almost
identical situation: We can’t say for sure at what time Tyler is coming, but he is expected
soon.
Tyler will come soon.
Tyler will be coming soon.
EXERCISE
4·3
Complete each sentence, using either the simple present or the present progressive tense
of the verb in parentheses.
EXAMPLE Cecilia can’t come to the door because she is washing (wash) her hair.
1. David (wash) his car every weekend.

2. Paul usually (eat) in front of the building, but today he
(eat) at the far corner table.
3. Please explain it to me again. I (try) to understand your
explanation.
4. I sent Paul an e-mail last week, but I haven’t received an answer yet.
I (still ⫹ wait) for his reply.
5. I was getting tired of gray skies. I’m glad the sun (shine) again
this morning.
6. Every morning at ten, the heater (turn on) and
(stay on) until mid-afternoon.
7. It’s so cold! No wonder it (hail).
8. Tyler is a basketball player, but he (not ⫹ play) right now,
because it’s off-season.
9. He (coach) kids during the summer, and he
(train) in the fall.
10. In the spring, he (attend) school in the morning and
(play) with his team in the afternoon.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 17 2/25/08 10:56:06 AM

EXERCISE
4·4
Complete each sentence, using either the simple past or the past progressive tense
EXAMPLE I went (go) to the park last week, but it was not (not ⫹ be) sunny
at all.
1. I (call) Kim yesterday morning, but she

(not ⫹ be) at home. She (visit)
her aunt like she usually does on Tuesday mornings.
2. I (hear) the neighbors washing their dishes last night,
because I (be) awake.
3. The weather was perfect yesterday when we had the picnic at Peace Park.
The sun (shine). A rather pleasant wind
(blow). The children (run) around
all day.
4. My parents (joke) about something when
I (enter) the room. They instantly
(stop) and (pretend)
they (do) something else.
5. I received a package from Korea in the mail. When I (open) it,
I (find) a letter from my girlfriend and a couple of pictures.
6. While Pedro (organize) his jazz records, his sister Miranda
(dust) off the turntables.
7. Steven (prefer) the science fiction stories he heard on the radio.
8. While his dad (tell) him the story of the Three Mosquitoes, Steven
(fall) asleep, so his dad quietly (close)
the book and silently (walk) out of the room.
9. Mike (run) down the stairs when his foot
(catch) in one of the rails. Unfortunately,
he (break) his knee and ankle.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 18 2/25/08 10:56:06 AM

EXERCISE
4·5
Complete each sentence, using either the present progressive or the future progressive
tense of the verb in parentheses.
EXAMPLE Right now, I am playing. Tomorrow at this time, I will be working (work).
1. I will leave the university at three tomorrow. When I (arrive)

at yoga class, my friends (wait) for me to begin the warm-up
exercises.
2. ARCHIE: When do you leave for summer camp?
VANESSA: In a couple of days. Can you believe it? A week from now,
I (sleep) under the stars. I (climb)
mountains.
ARCHIE: Sounds like fun! I (think) of you the whole time.
3. ALFONSO: Are you going to be downtown next Saturday evening?
CATHERINE: No, I don’t think so. I (stay) home to finish painting
my living room.
4. Look at those dark clouds on the horizon. I bet by the time our drive
(be) over and we get home, it (rain).
5. Next winter at this time, I (use) the exact same gloves I am using
right now. They’re just way too expensive.
6. RICHARD: How will I reach you if your cell-phone battery goes dead?
MICHAEL: I (stay) at the Thunderbird and
I (be) pretty sure they have phones in the rooms.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 19 2/25/08 10:56:06 AM

·5· The perfect tenses
The perfect tenses are formed with the auxiliary verb have ⫹ a past participle. The
perfect tenses express the idea that an action was begun in the past and continued
until a later time.
The present perfect

The present perfect tense is so named because the auxiliary have is conjugated in
the present tense. It is used to describe an action that began in the past and con-
tinues until the present.
She has drawn her mom a picture every day for the past two weeks.
I haven’t met anyone interesting since I moved into this apartment complex.
I have navigated a sailboat many times.
He has already showered.
When combined with prepositional phrases that start with since or for, the
present perfect can also express an action or situation that began in the past and
that is still taking place in the present. Note that the concept of an action in prog-
ress or incomplete is expressed in the present perfect by a verb formed in the
progressive.
I have had these red gloves for three years.
I have liked Harold and the Purple Crayon since I was five years old.
I have been living on this island for two years.
I have been standing here since eight o’clock.
EXERCISE
5·1
Complete each sentence, using either the simple past or the present
perfect tense of the verb in parentheses.
EXAMPLE He has been (be) to many conferences since June.
1. Up to now, Mrs. Rosenthal (give) us few tasks.

I thought she would be more demanding than this.
2. So far this month, I (smoke) only two cigarettes.
3. We (know) each other for almost ten years now.
20
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 20 2/25/08 10:56:07 AM

4. In my whole lifetime, I (never ⫹ see) such
a violent storm.
5. Last November, I (feel) heartbroken for the first time in my life.
6. Try not to talk too loudly again before the end of the movie.
You (already ⫹ annoy) the people sitting behind us.
You (get) us in trouble the last time we came to this theater.
7. Henry (be) here since the Easter holidays.
8. Olivia (land) in Hawaii four hours ago.
9. Alicia (break) the door last weekend, but it was an accident.
EXERCISE
5·2
Practice forming past participles by beginning each sentence with I have never ⫹
the past participle of the verb in parentheses.
EXAMPLE I have never left (leave) my shoes in a restaurant.
1. (feed) a tiger.
2. (read) Lord of the Flies.
3. (wreck) my car.
4. (understand) Albert Einstein’s theory of relativity.
5. (think) about Darwin’s theory of evolution.
6. (build) a house.
7. (fly) a kite.
8. (hold) a baby.
9. (sleep) in a tent.
10. (travel) to Russia.
11. (teach) English.
12. (vote) for local representatives.
13. (listen) to Charles Mingus.
14. (catch) a butterfly.
15. (make) a blueberry pie.
16. (win) the lottery.
17. (send) an e-mail to the chief of staff of the U.S. Army.
18. (eat) chicken ice cream.
unit 5 The perfect tenses 21
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 21 2/25/08 10:56:07 AM

19. (steal) a bike.
20. (fall) off a cliff.
21. (bring) a penguin to class.
22. (forget) my name.
23. (drink) absinth.
Chronological references
Certain references to time require the use of a specific tense. The present perfect tense is used
when the chronological reference is to an action begun in the past and continuing into the pres-
ent. The simple past tense indicates that the action was completed in the past. Following are
examples of chronological references that suggest the use of the present perfect tense.
I have worked here since the beginning of November.
Have you lived here for a long time?
During the past year, Pedro has seen several accidents at this corner.
The progressive form of the present perfect can be used to emphasize that an action is in
progress or continues over a long period of time.
In the last few weeks, we have been traveling over much of Europe.
Compare these chronological references with ones that suggest the use of the simple past tense.
Helena bought several new blouses yesterday.
Were you in Boston again last week?
She stayed in the old house for only a few days after her grandmother died.
Bill lost over a hundred dollars while in Las Vegas.
EXERCISE
5·3
Complete each sentence with appropriate chronological references. Use any reference
you wish (for example, dates, days, or years), as long as it makes sense in the sentence.
EXAMPLES Today is the 12th of January . I first met my English teacher

five months ago . I have known him since September .
I have known him for five months .
Today is Monday . I first met my English teacher last week . I have

known him since Tuesday . I have known him for six days .
1. Today is . I bought this book .

I have had this book since . I have had it for
.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 22 2/25/08 10:56:08 AM

2. I first decided she was my best friend . I have known her
for . I have known her since .
3. It is 200 . I started going to school in 19 /200 . I have been a student for
. I have been a student since .
4. Yesterday was . I moved to this town
. I have been living in this town since
. I have been here for .
EXERCISE
5·4
Complete each sentence, using either the simple past or the present perfect tense
EXAMPLE What has she bought (she ⫹ buy) since she walked in (walk in)
the store?
1. Since the end of the nineteenth century, scientists (make)

many important discoveries.
2. Thanks to new techniques and new discoveries, medical analysis
(advance) a great deal in the twentieth century.
3. Economic systems are different from those implemented in the 1800s. For example,
the information gathered to conduct analysis (change)
greatly through the years. In the 1800s, these systems (be)
mainly focused on national indicators. Today, however, international economies
(become) efficient, and it is necessary to take them
into account. In the 1800s, domestic economies (be)
self-sufficient and could survive with little trade. Today, all economies, small and large,
are connected.
4. It’s undeniable that she (get) older since we last saw her,
but one can’t deny she (also ⫹ get) wiser. She also seems
to (become) funnier.
5. Yesterday, my father and I (have) some free time,
so we (go) to watch the movie Hotel Rwanda. We then
headed out to a coffeehouse and (talk) about it for
hours.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 23 2/25/08 10:56:08 AM

6. What (you ⫹ learn) since you
(begin) reading this chapter?
7. How many people (you ⫹ meet) who only spoke English?
I hope you (already ⫹ meet) many interesting people.
8. PAUL: Do you like beef jerky?
LAURA: I don’t know, I (never ⫹ taste) it before.
9. (you ⫹ ever ⫹ meet) my friend Dolly?
10. RICHARD: Are you taking Professor Snape’s class this semester?
NICOLE: No, I (already ⫹ take) it twice.
I (fail) it in October,
and I (take) it again last semester.
11. PIERRE: Do you do much traveling?
MARTHA: Yes, it’s really one of those things that make me happy.
PIERRE: What countries (you ⫹ go) to?
MARTHA: Well, when I was a child, my dad’s job required that we travel a lot.
I (be) to England, Turkey, Madagascar, Spain, and Portugal.
PIERRE: I (never ⫹ be) to Turkey or Madagascar.
When (you ⫹ be) in Madagascar?
MARTHA: Three years ago. I (also ⫹ visit) the neighboring
islands. I (take) a boat tour that lasted two weeks.
PIERRE: What were the names of the islands that
(you ⫹ visit)?
MARTHA: I can’t remember anymore. The names (be) quite
difficult to pronounce, so I (have) a very difficult time
memorizing them.
PIERRE: I (always ⫹ want) to go abroad,
but I (not ⫹ have) the opportunity to do so.
I (go) to Senegal three years ago, but
I (not ⫹ travel) since then.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 24 2/25/08 10:56:08 AM

The past perfect
The past perfect tense expresses an action that began in the past and ended in the past. It is called
the past perfect because the auxiliary have is conjugated in the past tense.
Until yesterday evening, I had never seen that movie.
The cat simply left the house. Someone had forgotten to shut the back door.
He had already showered when we arrived.
When the conjunctions before or after are used to introduce a clause, the past perfect is rarely
necessary, because the time relationship is already established and is usually clear. However, the
past perfect may be used, even though the simple past suffices. Compare the following sets of
examples.
Catherine had arrived before we called her.
Catherine arrived before we called her.
After Anna had left, I went for a walk.
After Anna left, I went for a walk.
EXERCISE
5·5
Read each sentence and think about the time relationship established by the verb forms,
then answer the question that follows.
EXAMPLE Peter was leaving the gym when I got there. Elizabeth had left the gym when
I got there.
Whom did I run into when I got to the gym? Peter
1. Ralph was walking into the kitchen when the cell phone rang. Pedro walked into the kitchen
after the cell phone rang.
Who expected the cell phone to ring?
2. Mrs. Wilson taught at UT-Arlington for eight years. Mr. Prince has taught at UT-Arlington
for eight years.
Who is teaching at UT-Arlington now?
3. Tyler went to buy groceries because he was running out of food. Robin went to buy
groceries because he had run out of food.
Who is planning ahead?
4. When it stopped snowing, Lucas was walking to the bus stop. When it stopped snowing,
Bertrand walked to the bus stop.
Which of the two probably caught a cold?
5. Lucy was leaving the room when I walked in. Ruben had left the room when I walked in.
Whom did I run into when entering the room?
6. She looked across the street, and Paul was waving at her. She looked across the street,
and Fabien waved at her.
Who had already started waving at her before she looked across the street?
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 25 2/25/08 10:56:08 AM

7. Lucas put on a jacket because he had been waiting at the bus stop for too long.
Bertrand put on a jacket because he was waiting at the bus stop.
Who was the first one to put on his jacket?
8. When I finally made it to the restaurant, Alicia had already ordered a cocktail. When I finally
made it to the restaurant, Marie ordered a cocktail.
Who was drinking when I finally made it to the restaurant?
9. Kenji lived in Tokyo for two years. His uncle has been living in Okinawa for twelve years.
Who is still living in Japan?
EXERCISE
5·6
Complete each sentence, using either the simple past or the past perfect tense
of the verb(s) in parentheses. In some cases, either tense is possible.
EXAMPLE She had already finished (already ⫹ finish) her graduate studies before
she turned (turn) 21 years old.
1. There was a strong wind and it was raining hard, but by the time my shift at work
(be) over, the storm (stop).
2. The anthropologist (leave) the Yucatan region
once she (collect) enough information and
(record) a decent amount of data.
3. I was late. Professor Griffin (already ⫹ give)
a quiz when I (get) to class.
She (also ⫹ hand out) the syllabus for next semester.
4. I (feel) much better after I
(take) the aspirin you (give) me.
5. He (be) a curator for the Metropolitan Museum before
he (become) a writer.
6. Sophie (lock) herself out of the apartment.
She (walk out) the door thinking she
(take) everything she would need for the day. In the rush,
she (forget) her keys on the kitchen counter.
7. Up until then, it (be) a beautiful day. But when we finally
(make) it to the gates of Yosemite National Park, the clouds
(block out) the sun and the scenery was no longer charming.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 26 2/25/08 10:56:09 AM

Had used as an auxiliary verb is commonly contracted with personal pronouns when
people speak or write informally: I’d, he’d, and so on.
EXERCISE
5·7
Complete each sentence, using either the simple past or the past perfect tense
of the verb(s) in parentheses.
1. Yesterday at a bar, I (run) into Janet, an old friend of mine

from college. I (not ⫹ see) her in almost five years.
I immediately (recognize) her even though she
(change) her hair color and
(lose) at least five kilos.
2. I almost missed my train. All the other passengers
(already ⫹ occupy) all the cabins in my assigned car by the time
I (buy) my ticket and
(make) my way to the platform.
3. I (never ⫹ see) any of Ansel Adams’ photographs
before I (visit) the Boston Museum of Fine Arts.
4. Millions of years ago, dinosaurs (roam) the planet,
but they (become) extinct by the time humankind
(evolve).
5. The meeting (already ⫹ begin) by the time
I (get) there, so I quietly
(sit down) in the back row and (try) to catch up with the
ongoing topic of discussion.
The future perfect

The future perfect tense expresses an action that will begin and end in the future. It is formed with
the future tense of have plus a past participle: he will have understood.
I will move to Boston in July. I will see you in September. By the time we meet again,
I will have moved to Boston.
She will have finished painting the kitchen before she goes out to have dinner with Paul.
She will already have eaten when I get there.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 27 2/25/08 10:56:09 AM

EXERCISE
5·8
Complete each sentence by changing the verb(s) in parentheses to the appropriate
tense(s).
EXAMPLE We’re ten minutes late. By the time we get to the movie theater, the movie
will have already begun (already ⫹ begin) and we will miss (miss)
the beginning of the story.
1. This traffic is terrible. We’re going to miss the departure of the Greyhound bus. By the time
we (get) to the Greyhound station, the bus I need to take
(already ⫹ leave) the station.
2. Merrick and Toy got married last October. It’s January, and Merrick and Toy
(be) married for four months. By December,
they (be) married for three months. By February,
they (be) married for five months.
3. We have been together for a long time. By my next birthday, we
(be) dating for three and a half years.
4. What? He broke his ankle again? At this rate, he (suffer)
two dozen fractures by the time he (retire) from triathlon
competitions.
5. I don’t understand how those triathlon competitors do it. They began the race three hours
ago. By the time they get to the finish line, they (run)
and (swim) nonstop for eight hours!
6. Go ahead and take the day off. By tomorrow morning,
I (take) care of those court cases for you.
7. The traffic was awful this afternoon. By the time we (get)
to the Greyhound bus station, Mike’s bus
(already ⫹ arrive).
8. This morning, I came to visit my grandmother at ten o’clock. It is almost 11 and I am still
walking in the park with my grandmother. I (walk) with
my grandmother for an hour. By ten thirty, I (walk) with
my grandmother for half an hour. By noon, I (walk)
with my grandmother for two hours.
9. Jules was born in 1950. By the year 2010, he (live) in Berlin
for 60 years.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 28 2/25/08 10:56:09 AM

10. I’m so tired of sitting on this plane. Do you realize that by the time we arrive in Tokyo,
we (travel) for 20 hours straight?
EXERCISE
5·9
Complete each sentence, using appropriate tense(s) for the verb(s) in parentheses.
1. Tomorrow, after he (go) to the movies,

Tyler (meet) Barbara for a drink downtown.
This means that by the time he (meet) Barbara,
he (watch) the movie.
2. Since the beginning of the summer, Elizabeth (read)
three novels. Right now, she (read) 1984, a novel written
by George Orwell. She (read) it for the past two weeks.
She (intend) to finish it by next week. In her lifetime,
she (read) many science fiction novels, but this is one
of the most fascinating novels she (ever ⫹ read).
3. A couple of days ago, Elizabeth (begin) to read 1984.
It’s a dense novel. She (not ⫹ finish) reading it yet. She
(read) it because one of her good friends recommended it.
4. Right now, the children (take) a nap.
They both (fall) asleep an hour ago.
They (sleep) for an hour. It’s likely that they
(sleep) for another half hour or so.
5. Yesterday morning, Cecilia woke up and ate breakfast. She
(already ⫹ eat) breakfast when she (leave) her apartment.
She (usually ⫹ try) to eat a healthy breakfast before she
(head out) to class. I usually
(not ⫹ eat) breakfast before I (go) to work. But I often
(get) hungry before mid-morning. Tomorrow,
I (try) something different, and before
I (go) to work, I (eat)
breakfast.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 29 2/25/08 10:56:09 AM

6. Cecilia is in my history class. She (study) history this
semester. She (also ⫹ take) some other classes. Her classes
(begin) at eight in the morning every day.
7. Marie is in yoga class every afternoon from six to seven thirty. Three days ago,
I (go) by her apartment to see if she
(want) to jog with me around Town Lake.
8. Don’t try to call Marie on her home phone at seven in the evening, because she
(attend) her yoga class at that time.
9. Yesterday, Francis (lock) himself in the darkroom between
three and four o’clock in the afternoon. I (come) by
to see him at three thirty. When I (get) there, Francis
(mix) the chemicals he
(use) to develop his pictures. He (work) on his pictures
for 30 minutes by the time I arrived.
EXERCISE
5·10
Complete each sentence, using appropriate tense(s) for the verb(s) in parentheses.
1. PAUL: May I borrow some money? My payment

(be) supposed to go through this morning, but for some reason the bank
(not ⫹ have) received it yet.
I (need) to pay my rent by six o’clock,
but I (not ⫹ have) any money.
PATRICIA: Sure, I’d be glad to, but I (not ⫹ know) how much
money I have in my account. How much (you ⫹ need)?
PAUL: About 400 dollars. I promise I (pay) you back as
soon as my bank (take) care of the problem.
2. PIERRE: Hello?
PATRICIA: Hello, may I speak to Paul?
PIERRE: He (not ⫹ be) at home right now, sorry.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 30 2/25/08 10:56:10 AM

PATRICIA: Could you please tell him that Patricia (call).
If he (get) home before noon, could you tell him to meet
me at Café Bourville? I (sit) at one of the tables on the
terrace (study) German.
3. Yesterday, while I (sit) in class,
I (begin) to feel ill. The person who
(sit) next to me (ask) me
if I was feeling okay. I (try) to assure her that everything
(be) okay, but she (do) not
listen to me. The professor (talk), and I didn’t want to
interrupt him, so I just (sit) there trying to focus on the
lecture. Finally, after I (feel) ill for about 20 minutes,
I (raise) my hand and (ask)
to be excused.
4. About five hours ago, David (lie) on the couch reading
a novel. Suddenly, he (hear) a loud bang at the door
and (get) up to see who it might be.
He (look) through the peephole and then
(open) the door. Someone
(just ⫹ leave) a book on the doormat and (take off ).
5. Next month, I (take) a week’s vacation. I haven’t been able
to do so in over a year, so I (really ⫹ look) forward to it.
First, I (go) to the south of France to visit my brother. After
I (leave) Marseille, I (go) to
Berlin to see a friend who (study) political science there.
Esther (live) there for two years, so I presume that she
(know) the city well. For whatever it’s worth,
she (promise) to be my tour guide while
I (stay) there. I (never ⫹ be)
to Europe, so I’m pretty excited about the whole trip. Berlin is one of those cities
I (always ⫹ want) to visit.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 31 2/25/08 10:56:10 AM

EXERCISE
5·11
For each sentence, determine whether the form of have is used as a verb
or as an auxiliary verb.
EXAMPLES They have cleaned everything. auxiliary verb

They have no money. verb
1. He has three sisters.

2. She has eaten the entire cake.
3. They have four cats.
4. He had finished the exercises.
5. He has a pencil, but it needs sharpening.
6. We have run all the way over here.
01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 32 2/25/08 10:56:10 AM

Modal auxiliaries ·6·
Auxiliaries can be organized into two groups. The first of these groups consists of
the three high-frequency auxiliaries be, have, and do. Besides functioning as aux-
iliaries, they may also be used as verbs.
Carlos is a marketing manager.
Yvette has six children.
The Wyatt brothers do business efficiently.
When be is used as an auxiliary verb, it is combined with a present
participle.
Carlos is setting goals for the year to come.
When have is used as an auxiliary verb, it is combined with a past participle.
Yvette has done all she can to raise them.
And when do is used as an auxiliary, it can be used with not to negate a state-
ment; it can also introduce a question or add emphasis to a statement.
The Wyatt brothers don’t like to lose their investors.
Do you spend a lot of time at the library?
We do go to the library on Saturdays, if not during the week.
A second group of auxiliaries is the modal auxiliaries. Some of the most fre-
quently used modal auxiliaries are be to, be supposed to, may, might, must, can,
could, had better, have to, have got to, ought to, should, used to, and would. For the
most part, these auxiliaries express the speaker’s mind-set or mood. In addition,
modal auxiliaries may indicate possibility, permission, obligation, or ability.
They should talk to their parents about it.
Every morning I would drive 15 miles to work.
I might be able to finish the kitchen by tonight.
Modal auxiliaries always precede the verb in the sentence, regardless of the
verb form, including the addition of the auxiliaries be, have, and do. Modal auxil-
iaries (except those that include be or have) do not change form for number, and
some make no tense changes.
When used in the present tense, most modal auxiliaries are followed by
the base form of the verb.
Mom might make fried chicken tonight.
They must consider every possibility.
33
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 33 2/25/08 10:59:56 AM

In order to form a question with a modal auxiliary, move the auxiliary to the beginning of
the sentence in front of the subject.
Can you lift this heavy box?
May our friends join you for lunch?
To form a negative statement with a modal auxiliary, place the word not immediately after
the modal auxiliary and before all other auxiliary verbs.
I cannot understand a word she says.
Maybe she should not have borrowed that winter jacket.
Would and could specify a desired or hypothetical situation. These two auxiliaries are often
used in a main clause when if ⫹ a subjunctive form is used in the other clause.
He would really like to eat one.
I wish I could go horse riding.
If I were a rich man, I would build homeless shelters everywhere.
Would is also used to indicate a habitual action.
I would often go to the movies with my sister.
Can indicates the ability to do something. Note that its past form is could.
Walking down that road can be dangerous.
Man can travel far into outer space.
She could not see where the road ended.
Whereas can indicates the ability to do something, may indicates that something is accept-
able. In casual speech, however, can is often substituted for may.
Anne may borrow my car if she needs to.
Anne can borrow my car if she needs to.
The first sentence above indicates that Anne has permission to borrow the car, while the second
sentence indicates that Anne has the ability to borrow it, or, if used casually, that she has permis-
sion to borrow it.
Although there is no clear-cut rule, may is usually used to make polite requests.
May I have one of those forms, please?
Dad, may we go swimming today?
Must indicates necessity or requirement; it can also express certainty.
We must obtain a license before we can sell liquor.
I must insist that you finish the job by dusk.
If he’s not here, he must have been delayed.
May and might can both indicate uncertainty or possibility.
I may have to go to New York this weekend.
The children may need a flu shot.
We might have another storm tonight.
You might be right.
Had better and ought to suggest that something needs to be done and imply advisability.
You had better be on time for your own party.
She really ought to find new friends.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 34 2/25/08 10:59:57 AM

EXERCISE
6·1
Underline the correct modal auxiliary in each sentence.
1. It’s raining, and you may 兩 might not play outside.

2. His father should 兩 may not believe him blindly.
3. Don’t send the e-mail out, because I might 兩 must change my mind.
4. Would 兩 Should we leave the clothes to dry outside?
5. If they rehearsed more often, they may 兩 would become a good rock band.
6. He can 兩 may play basketball really well, and he’s a good student as well.
7. No one can 兩 must play the drums better than John.
8. The hurricane should 兩 could cause a lot of damage if it hits the coast.
9. They may 兩 must go hiking tomorrow if the weather is nice.
10. You could 兩 should not play with knives or guns.
EXERCISE
6·2
Complete each sentence with an appropriate phrase.
EXAMPLE You must learn to respect your elders .
1. He can .
2. She would .
3. I should .
4. You ought to .
5. He had better .
6. May I ?
7. Can you please ?
8. Why must that man ?
unit 6 Modal auxiliaries 35
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 35 2/25/08 10:59:57 AM

EXERCISE
6·3
Complete each sentence with either must or should.
EXAMPLE They should buy organic fruit, because it’s healthier.
1. We go to India for our spring vacation.

2. If you want to become a lawyer, you go to law school.
3. A child drink at least three glasses of milk a day.
4. A person eat a balanced diet.
5. A person eat in order to live.
6. According to my academic advisor, I take another history course.
7. I pay my bills online tonight, but I think I’ll wait and do it in the
morning.
8. Everyone have a goal in life.
9. You have a passport issued before you can leave the country.
10. Wheat have plenty of sun in order to grow.
11. If the car is locked, you use a key to open it.
12. I go to work, but I don’t feel well. I think I’ll stay home.
13. I just missed the last bus, so I walk home.
14. If you don’t know how to pronounce a word, you ask a native speaker
of English to pronounce it for you.
15. This cake is very good. You try a piece.
16. This cake is excellent! You try a piece!
Shades of meaning
Ought to and had better express advisability. But besides expressing advisability, ought to, as well
as should, may suggest that care be taken in carrying out the action of the verb. In addition, they
may imply duty or responsibility in carrying out that action.
ADVISABILITY You ought to stay here till the storm ends.
You had better stay here till the storm ends.
SUGGESTION You should try harder.
You ought to try harder.
DUTY OR RESPONSIBILITY Children should follow the school’s safety regulations.
Children ought to follow the school’s safety regulations.
Had better is similar in meaning to ought to and should, but it is usually stronger. The auxil-
iary had better often expresses a warning. It is followed by the basic form of the verb and has
either a present or future meaning.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 36 2/25/08 10:59:57 AM

Our left front tire is almost flat. We had better stop to fill it with air.
She had better clean that wound as soon as possible, or it might get infected.
Like the auxiliary verb had, the verb had in the auxiliary had better can contract with a
subject pronoun: you’d better, they’d better, and so on.
The past form of should is composed of should have ⫹ past participle.

I had an exam this morning. I didn’t do well on it, because I read the wrong chapter.
I should have been more attentive in class.
It feels like I really hurt my ankle. I should not have played soccer for so long this afternoon.
The past form of ought to is composed of ought to have ⫹ past participle.
I ought to have read the right chapter.
You ought to have thought about the consequences before you volunteered.
EXERCISE
6·4
For each pair of sentences, select the one that is stronger in meaning or shows
greater obligation.
1. a. You’d better not go out there alone.
b. You shouldn’t go out there alone.
2. a. She shouldn’t go into that room.
b. She must not go into that room.
3. a. I should call the police.
b. I have to call the police.
4. a. They must go to class.
b. They ought to go to class.
5. a. You should go to the doctor.
b. You had better go to the doctor.
6. a. He has to go to work.
b. He ought to go to work.
EXERCISE
6·5
Respond to each sentence, using the past form should have or should not have.
EXAMPLE You forgot to set your alarm clock, because you fell asleep on the couch.
I shouldn’t have fallen asleep on the couch.
1. You didn’t do your exercises, because you went to a movie.
2. You failed the exam, because you didn’t study.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 37 2/25/08 10:59:57 AM

3. You didn’t read the chapter, because you played video games instead.
4. You misspelled a word, because you didn’t look it up in the dictionary.
5. The room is full of mosquitoes, because you left the window open.
6. It’s warm in here, because you turned off the fan.
7. You’re poor, because you spent all your money while you were on vacation.
8. You can’t make dinner, because you didn’t go grocery shopping.
9. You are cold, because you left your coat at home.
10. You can’t look her in the eye, because you lied to her.
11. You didn’t have coffee this morning. You’re feeling very sleepy.
12. You have a stomachache, because you ate all the ice cream.
Have to and have got to express necessity. Like must, they suggest that there is no other
choice.
All candidates have to take the grammar test.
I simply have got to get there on time.
In informal conversation, must usually carries a stronger connotation than have to and often
indicates a sense of urgency.
I have to speak to Robert. I was hoping we could get together for lunch.
I must speak to Robert immediately. His brother was in a car accident.
The past tense of have to is had to.
I have to leave by tomorrow morning.
I had to leave by this morning.
Have to and must, when in the negative, express lack of necessity or prohibition. Do not
have to indicates that something is unnecessary, while must not indicates that something is not
allowed.
Tomorrow is Christmas, and we do not have to go to work.
You must not tamper with that device.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 38 2/25/08 10:59:58 AM

EXERCISE
6·6
Complete each sentence with either must not (mustn’t) or do/does not have to
(don’t/doesn’t have to).
EXAMPLE He’s already finished painting the kitchen, so I do not have to paint anymore.
1. I’ve already finished all my reading for tomorrow, so I study

tonight. I will go to the movies instead.
2. I forget to take my key with me before leaving. I could get
locked out of my apartment.
3. The second part of the exam is optional. She take it, but she
probably should.
4. Polar bears are beautiful animals. We allow them to become
extinct.
5. If you get bitten by a snake, you panic, because it will accelerate
your pulse and your blood circulation. This will cause the venom to travel faster through
your body.
6. This is a one-time opportunity to get the job you’ve always dreamed of. You
let it pass you by. Accept the offer.
7. Dolphins see in order to avoid obstacles like fishing boats.
Even in complete darkness, they would be able to navigate around them.
8. When crossing borders in Europe, one declare merchandise
anymore. The new border regulations set by the European Union are looser.
9. We go see that play if you don’t want to, but from what
I understand, it’s really good.
10. You play with matches. Look around you, Peter, this house
is entirely made out of wood.
11. A person own a three-story house or a minivan to be happy.
12. She really doesn’t feel well. We wait until she has a fever to call
the doctor. We wait any longer to take her to the hospital.
13. In order to make friends, you be rude.
14. You be a genius to learn English.
15. You lend me their new album. I was able to buy it in advance
four weeks ago, so I’ve already heard it several times.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 39 2/25/08 10:59:58 AM

Be supposed to and be to express expectation. They suggest that someone is expecting some-
thing about a scheduled situation, the fulfillment of conditions, or the use of proper procedures.
If used in conversation, be to is usually stronger in meaning and more clear-cut than be sup-
posed to.
The plane is supposed to take off in an hour.
The plane is to take off at ten in the morning.
In the first example, the speaker expects the flight to take off in an hour, because that’s when it is
scheduled to depart. The second sentence is similar in meaning to the first sentence, but it states
a fact. The speaker knows with certainty when the plane will be taking off.
Be to and be supposed to can also express expectation about behavior.
I am supposed to go to this meeting. My director told me he would be pleased to see
me there.
I am to be at this meeting. My director told us it is mandatory.
EXERCISE
6·7
Rewrite each sentence, beginning with You are (not) to.
EXAMPLE Do not enter private property.

You are not to enter private property.
1. Keep off the grass.

2. No eating or drinking inside.
3. Move to the rear of the plane.
4. Do not feed the monkeys.
5. No smoking.
6. No visitors allowed on board.
7. No littering.
8. Do not use the elevator in case of fire.
Used to expresses a habitual action in the past, one that is no longer performed or repeated.
Used to can be used interchangeably with would in this sense. However, since would also has other
meanings, it requires an indication of past time to make sense. Compare the following sets of
examples.
I used to go surfing every summer.
When I was a teenager, I would go surfing every summer.
I used to run five miles every morning.
Before I broke my knee, I would run five miles every morning.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 40 2/25/08 10:59:58 AM

Special auxiliaries
In modern English, shall has generally been replaced by will. In the past, shall was used as the
first-person form of will to express the future tense. Nowadays, shall is usually used in a context
where the speaker wishes to sound very polite or very formal.
When shall and will are used in questions, however, their meanings differ greatly. Will indi-
cates the future tense, while shall (when used before I or we) means that the speaker is making a
suggestion or asking someone else whether he or she agrees with the suggestion being made.
Will we drive to the nearest gas station?
Will we get a cup of tea?
Shall we drive to the nearest gas station?
Let’s go, shall we?
Let’s (let us) and why don’t are modal auxiliaries that are used to make suggestions or friendly
or polite commands.
Let’s go to a movie.
Why don’t you pick me up at eight or so?
EXERCISE
6·8
In each sentence, underline the modal auxiliary that more appropriately introduces
the question.
EXAMPLE Can 兩 May I take you to the movies?
1. Can 兩 May you explain this magic trick to me?

2. Can 兩 May I offer you coffee?
3. Will 兩 Shall we have to pay a cover charge to get into this club?
4. Will 兩 Shall we go the beach if it’s still sunny?
5. Can 兩 May you give me directions to Paul’s house?
6. Will 兩 Shall they let us use the swimming pool?
7. Let’s dance, can 兩 shall we?
EXERCISE
6·9
For each pair of sentences, select the one that is stronger in meaning.
1. a. We had better bring some water.

b. We should bring some water.
2. a. We ought to bring some water.
b. We have got to bring some water.
3. a. You have got to drink water.
b. You should drink water.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 41 2/25/08 10:59:58 AM

4. a. You are to drink water.
b. You ought to drink water.
5. a. You must drink water.
b. You had better drink water.
6. a. You were supposed to bring some water.
b. You had to bring some water.
7. a. You are supposed to bring some water.
b. You are to bring some water.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 42 2/25/08 10:59:59 AM

The progressive forms
of modal auxiliaries
·7·
The present progressive form of a modal auxiliary is composed of a modal auxil-

iary ⫹ be ⫹ verb form ending in -ing. The meaning consists of the meaning of the
modal auxiliary and that of the present-tense progressive form of the verb.
In the example below, the speaker wonders (may) whether Sophie is resting.
We should probably come back later. Sophie may be resting.
In the example below, the speaker believes (must) that the store is closing.
The lights inside are being turned off. The store must be closing.
The past progressive form is composed of a modal auxiliary ⫹ have been ⫹
verb form ending in -ing. The meaning consists of the meaning of the modal aux-
iliary and that of the past-tense progressive form of the verb.
In the example below, the speaker suspects (might) that Diana was sleeping
in.
Diana wasn’t at church today. She might have been sleeping in.
In the example below, the speaker believes (must) that Paul was studying all
night.
Paul looked tired this morning. He must have been studying all night.
By using a modal auxiliary, a speaker is choosing to express a degree of cer-
tainty or uncertainty. The degree of certainty reflects how sure the speaker is of
something happening or how true his or her statement might be. If the speaker is
sure of something, he or she doesn’t use a modal.
He is sick.
If the speaker wants to express a strong degree of certainty, he or she uses
must.
He must be sick.
If the speaker wants to express a weak degree of certainty, he or she uses may,
might, or could:
He may be sick.
43
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 43 2/25/08 10:59:59 AM

EXERCISE
7·1
Complete each sentence, using the verb in parentheses with the modal auxiliary that
best expresses the degree of certainty of the statement (must, should, may, could,
or might). Use the correct progressive form of the verb.
EXAMPLE Serge seems very busy these days. He may be finishing (finish) his doctoral
dissertation.
1. Don’t be mad at Henry. He didn’t mean to offend you. I think he

(kid).
2. Sorry for the noise. Olivia is upstairs with her friends, and they
(play) some sort of game that requires running
around a lot.
3. I am wasting time right now. I am playing video games, but I
(study). I have a final in Economics first thing
in the morning.
4. I really need to speak to Peter right away, but I can’t remember what hotel he told me he
would be staying in. He (stay) at the Hilton, but I’m not
sure. He (stay) at the Concorde.
5. Don’t be mad at Henry. Although I am not sure, I doubt he meant to offend you.
He (kid) when he said that, but who knows?
6. All the people coming into the restaurant are carrying wet umbrellas.
It (rain) outside.
7. I am not sure whether Marie is in her room or not. She
(jog) around the park like she usually does at this time of the day.
8. I smell smoke. Something (burn).
9. He is over an hour late, but I don’t know for sure where he could be.
He (ride) the bus over here, which will take him
a while. Or he (walk), in which case I doubt he will
be here in time for dinner.
10. I heard he hurt himself while rock climbing. He (climb)
without supervision.
The distinction between two forms of modal auxiliaries needs to be clarified: used to
and be used to. Used to expresses a “habitual past,” an activity or a situation that existed
in the past but no longer exists. It is formed by using used to ⫹ base form of the verb.
Alfred used to work for IBM.
My family used to vacation in Maryland.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 44 2/25/08 11:00:00 AM

Be used to is equivalent in meaning to “be familiar with” or “be accustomed to.” Both be
used to and be accustomed to can be followed by a gerund (a verb form ending in -ing),
a noun phrase, or a pronoun.
Kevin grew up in Alaska, so he is used to living in cold weather.
I think I’m finally used to working nights.
He wasn’t used to such rude behavior.
I’m finally used to it.
The modal auxiliaries would and used to are interchangeable when they express a habitual
past.
My brother and I used to go skiing every morning.
My brother and I would go skiing every morning.
However, when used to expresses a situation or state of being in the past, it cannot be re-
placed by would. This occurs most frequently with the verb be. The modal auxiliary would can
only be used to express a recurring action in the past.
I used to be a firefighter. (Would cannot be used.)
Didn’t you used to be a flight attendant? (Would cannot be used.)
EXERCISE
7·2
For each sentence, determine if a form of the verb be is required. If so, write the correct
form in the blank. If not, mark an X in the blank.
EXAMPLE Chris rides his bike everywhere. He is used to biking long distances.
1. A teacher used to correcting exercises quickly. Students often turn them in

at the last minute.
2. People used to think the earth was the center of the universe.
3. Peter used to do all the house chores, because he lived alone. Now he has a
roommate, so he only has to clean the dishes and sweep the floor.
4. In the American West, horses used to be the main means of transportation.
Today, hardly anyone uses horses. Instead, they travel by plane, because they
used to faster forms of transportation.
5. I have lived in South Africa for a long time. I used to high temperatures.
6. I used to live in the south of England, but now I live in Spain.
7. They used to sitting outside when they eat. During the summer, they always
sit at that picnic table.
8. When I was a teenager, I used to smoke cigarettes. I quit a long time ago,
though.
9. It’s too bad they closed the corner store. Alex and I used to stopping by there
to buy bottled water on our way to the basketball court.
unit 7 The progressive forms of modal auxiliaries 45
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 45 2/25/08 11:00:00 AM

10. I used to sitting in the back of the bus, but I don’t mind sitting in the front.
11. Chris has never owned a car. He used to taking public transportation.
12. Maria and I are from different cultures. She used to having eggs for breakfast.
I used to drinking coffee and running out the door.
EXERCISE
7·3
Complete each sentence, using the appropriate form of would or used to with the verb
in parentheses.
EXAMPLE I used to be (be) able to read two or three books a week.
1. I (be) scared of sleeping with my door closed. Whenever I got

ready for bed, I (open) it.
2. Famine is still a problem in most of East Africa, but it (be) more
widespread than it is now.
3. I got a huge red kite when I was 12. My friend Chris (ask) to
borrow it so he could fly it too, but for months I (never ⫹ let)
any of my friends use it.
4. I remember my third-grade math teacher really well. Every morning, he
(begin) class by telling us how important mathematics
was in everyday life.
5. I (be) a political science major. After graduating, I was hired
to work at the United Nations. Every Wednesday morning, our council
(get together) and discuss articles from the local newspaper.
After that, we (go) to the cafeteria and have breakfast together.
Back then, I (drink) at least two cups of coffee a day, but now
I only drink tea.
6. I (be) very selfish. Whenever someone asked me for a favor,
I (make up) an excuse and I
(not ⫹ help) them.
7. I (be) scared of heights. My heart
(start) racing and I (have) trouble catching my breath. Now I am
used to it.
8. When I was in middle school, I (take) my soccer ball with me
every morning to play with the other kids.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 46 2/25/08 11:00:00 AM

9. When my grandmother was a girl, her mother (walk) her to
school every day.
10. Last summer my friend Mike and I went to Big Bend National Park. We had the greatest
of times. Every afternoon, we (swim) in the river,
we (dry out) while sitting in the sun, and then we
(get ready) for dinner. If we weren’t too tired, we
(hike) back to the camp instead of using our motorbikes.
11. I can remember Mrs. Limon well. She was my neighbor when I
(live) in San Francisco. She (always ⫹ smile) and
(say) hello to me whenever I’d run into her on my way home.
When I talked to her for too long, she (clear) her throat.
That was her way of telling me that she needed to get back to what she was doing.
unit 7 The progressive forms of modal auxiliaries 47
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 47 2/25/08 11:00:00 AM

·8· 8The auxiliary verb do
As an auxiliary verb, do (does/did) is typically used to form questions and negative

statements. Sometimes do is used to emphasize contradiction to something that
has already been said.
For the most part I don’t like dogs, but I do like my father’s German
shepherd.
Using do in questions
There are two types of questions: closed questions (also called yes/no questions)
and information questions. Yes/no questions, as the name suggests, are questions
that can be answered by yes or no.
Does he live in New York? Yes, he does.
Do they understand English? No, they don’t.
Did you get my letter? No, I didn’t.
Information questions are open questions that ask for information by using
a question word.
Where does he live? He lives in New York.
When did she arrive? She arrived yesterday.
A specific pattern is generally employed to form information questions: ques-
tion word ⫹ do ⫹ subject ⫹ main verb. Does is used in questions where the sub-
ject is in the third-person singular (he, she, it). Do is used with all other persons.
Did is used in the past tense.
Where does she live? She lives here.
Where do they live? They live here.
Where did he live? He lived here.
EXERCISE
8·1
For each sentence, write a closed question, then write an information
question using where.
EXAMPLE She exercises in this gym.

Does she exercise in this gym?
Where does she exercise?
48
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 48 2/25/08 11:00:00 AM

1. They come here.
2. She stayed here.
3. His airplane landed in the morning.
4. The package arrived.
5. Robert lives there.
Using do in negative sentences

There are affirmative sentences (The moon is white.), and there are negative sentences (The moon
is not white.). The word not is used to express negation. Except for the verb be and auxiliaries,
verbs require a form of the auxiliary do to make a negative statement.
He is not at home at the moment.
You must not play ball in the street.
but
They do not speak a word of Spanish.
The students did not have enough time for the exam.
Negative verb phrases are generally formed as follows.
AUXILIARY ⫹ not ⫹ VERB PHRASE SENTENCE
do not go there I do not go there.

does not go there He does not go there.
did not go there James did not go there.
It is common to combine do, does, and did with not to form a contraction.
I don’t go there.
He doesn’t go there.
James didn’t go there.
There are other negative adverbs in addition to not: rarely, never, seldom, scarcely (ever),
hardly (ever), and barely (ever).
unit 8 The auxiliary verb do 49
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 49 2/25/08 11:00:02 AM

You should avoid using double negatives. Whereas writing “I do not have any money”
is grammatically correct, writing (or even saying) “I do not have no money” is confus-
ing and grammatically incorrect, because it contains two negatives in the same clause
(do not ⫹ no). A clause should contain only one negative (do not or no).
EXERCISE
8·2
Make each sentence negative by using not . . . any.
EXAMPLE They have many financial debts.

They do not have any financial debts.
1. I own black-and-white movies.
2. I have problems with my computer.
3. We have time to waste.
4. I saw a person I know.
5. I need help with my homework.
6. I trust some of you.
7. I trust someone.
EXERCISE
8·3
For each sentence, write a yes/no question, then change it to a negative question.
Retain the tense of the original sentence.
EXAMPLE Tom works in New York.

Does Tom work in New York?
Doesn’t Tom work in New York?
1. The girls need some help.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 50 2/25/08 11:00:02 AM

2. She has a job in a bakery.
3. Bob saw somebody in the shadows.
4. I like hot tea.
EXERCISE
8·4
For each sentence, determine whether the form of do is used as a verb
or as an auxiliary verb.
EXAMPLES I do not like eating strawberries. auxiliary verb

Marie did her homework over. verb
1. They are doing their exercises.

2. He does not like the countryside.
3. She does nothing all day.
4. Did you finish your dinner?
5. I am doing what I was asked to do.
6. Did she make it on time?
unit 8 The auxiliary verb do 51
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 51 2/25/08 11:00:02 AM

·9· 9The passive voice
In English, most sentences can be written in two ways: in the active voice or in the
passive voice. Active-voice sentences can contain a subject, a transitive verb, and
an object.
Paul wrote the essay.
My sister reads my diary.
In a passive-voice sentence, the subject and object of an active-voice sentence
switch positions; the active object becomes the subject of the passive sentence, and
the active subject becomes the object of the preposition by. The verb from the
active sentence is changed to a past participle and is used with the auxiliary be.
The essay was written by Paul.
My diary is read by my sister.
The meaning of these active and passive examples is essentially the same. They are
simply two different ways of expressing the same action. Although the active voice
is the way you learn to write correct complete sentences, the passive voice is com-
mon in written English, especially in formal academic writing, and in newspapers
and magazines.
EXERCISE
9·1
Write A next to the sentences that are in the active voice; write P next
to the sentences in the passive voice.
1. The loan interest will be increased by the bank next month.

2. The United States is divided into many states.
3. English is studied by many people in the world.
4. George Orwell was writing a new novel.
5. That class was so boring.
6. Architecture is very interesting to me.
7. I was so surprised by his sudden decision to leave.
8. He was pushed by the man in the trench coat.
9. The tsunami happened in Southeast Asia.
52
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 52 2/25/08 11:00:02 AM

Using the passive
The passive voice occurs in all tenses and can even be used in a progressive tense. The following
examples show active sentences and their corresponding passive formations.
ACTIVE PASSIVE
SIMPLE PRESENT Eric carries Pam. Pam is carried by Eric.

PRESENT PROGRESSIVE Eric is carrying Pam. Pam is being carried by Eric.
SIMPLE PAST Eric carried Pam. Pam was carried by Eric.
PAST PROGRESSIVE Eric was carrying Pam. Pam was being carried by Eric.
PRESENT PERFECT Eric has carried Pam. Pam has been carried by Eric.
PAST PERFECT Eric had carried Pam. Pam had been carried by Eric.
SIMPLE FUTURE Eric will carry Pam. Pam will be carried by Eric.
FUTURE PERFECT Eric will have carried Pam. Pam will have been carried by Eric.
“be going to” FORM Eric is going to carry Pam. Pam is going to be carried by Eric.
When a sentence is changed from active to passive, the tense of the active sentence is retained
in the passive sentence.
Patrick paints a picture. A picture is painted by Patrick.
Samantha is teaching the class. The class is being taught by Samantha.
Robin borrowed a dollar. A dollar was borrowed by Robin.
Tyler has seen this episode. This episode has been seen by Tyler.
Alicia will prepare a salad. A salad will be prepared by Alicia.
EXERCISE
9·2
Rewrite each active sentence as a passive sentence, retaining the tense of the original
sentence.
1. Maria found a hundred dollars.
2. The students will memorize the Preamble to the Constitution.
3. Did you purchase the tickets?
4. They have discovered some ancient ruins.
5. Bill is measuring the room.
unit 9 The passive voice 53
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 53 2/25/08 11:00:03 AM

Sentences that cannot be written in the passive voice
Only transitive verbs—verbs followed by an object—can be used in the passive. It is not possible
to use intransitive verbs, such as happen, sleep, come, go, live, occur, rain, rise, depart, walk, and
seem, in the passive.
ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
Marie helped Peter. Peter was helped by Marie. (transitive verb)

The baby slept soundly. — (intransitive verb)
The student came to class. — (intransitive verb)
Forming the passive voice without a by phrase

The passive is often used when it is unimportant to know who or what performs the action. In the
sentence “Coffee is grown in Colombia,” we are informed where coffee is grown. Yet the coffee
could be grown by villagers, by children, by immigrants, or by any other group of people. Follow-
ing are examples that illustrate the most common ways of using the passive voice without a prepo-
sitional phrase introduced with by.
Rice is grown throughout Asia.
That car was built in the 1930s.
This watch was imported from Geneva, Switzerland.
Poor Mr. Lowry is going to be fired!
When the subject of an active sentence is some vague entity (they, someone, people), it is
common to avoid using a by phrase in the passive.
ACTIVE They cultivate grapes in southern France.
PASSIVE Grapes are cultivated in southern France.
By is used in the passive when it is important to inform the reader or listener who is respon-
sible for the action: “Perfume was written by Patrick Süskind.” In this case, it is important to know
that a specific author (and not just any author) wrote this particular book.
As a general rule, if the writer knows who performs the action, it’s preferable to use the active
voice: “My neighbor made the strawberry pie.” Stylistically, the writer could use the passive, but it
would mean that he or she is trying to direct the reader’s attention to the new subject: “The straw-
berry pie was made by my neighbor.”
EXERCISE
9·3
Rewrite each active sentence as a passive sentence. Don’t use a prepositional phrase
with by.
1. They manufactured a thousand cars at that plant.
2. Many people are developing theories about that.
3. Someone will buy that painting today.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 54 2/25/08 11:00:03 AM

4. They have postponed the opening of the new store.
5. No one respects his work.
EXERCISE
9·4
Rewrite each active sentence as a passive sentence.
EXAMPLE Two horses were pulling the princess’s carriage.

The princess’s carriage was being pulled by two horses.
1. Kevin has suggested a new design for the logo.
2. The professor is going to explain the formula.
3. Bartenders serve people at the bar.
4. Noam Chomsky is preparing a speech.
5. Alex will invite Marie to the party.
6. Neil Gaiman wrote the novel American Gods.
EXERCISE
9·5
Complete the second sentence of each pair with the correct passive form of the verb
phrase in the first sentence. Retain the tense of the original sentence.
EXAMPLE William was driving the car.

The car was being driven by William.
1. William will have driven the car.

The car driven by William.
2. William drives the car.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 55 2/25/08 11:00:04 AM

3. William is driving the car.
4. William has driven the car.
5. William is going to drive the car.
6. William will drive the car.
7. William had driven the car.
EXERCISE
9·6
Rewrite each passive sentence as an active sentence. If an active sentence is not possible,
mark an X in the blank.
EXAMPLE The karate tournament is being sponsored by Pepsi.

Pepsi is sponsoring the karate tournament.
1. Technical skills are taught by every professional school in New York.
2. The ping-pong tournament is being broadcast by TF1.
3. The Inner Movement Symphony is being televised all over New Zealand.
4. This poem was written by Keats. The other one was written by García Lorca.
5. Paper was invented in China. Later, paper was produced in Baghdad by Arabs.
6. The new bridge will be completed sometime next year.
7. My socks were made in Scotland.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 56 2/25/08 11:00:04 AM

EXERCISE
9·7
Rewrite each active sentence as a passive sentence, retaining the tense of the original
sentence. Use a by phrase wherever possible. If a passive sentence is not possible,
mark an X in the blank.
EXAMPLE Somebody took my chair.

My chair was taken by somebody.
1. Someone stole my purse.
2. Garret came to New York three days ago.
3. Gabriel borrowed my fork at lunch.
4. Someone made this antique sewing machine in 1834.
5. An accident happened on Loop 1 yesterday morning.
6. Steve was watering the plants when I walked into the garden this morning.
7. The jury is going to judge the president on the basis of his testimony.
8. When did America invent the atomic bomb?
9. Caroline slept until two o’clock!
10. Is Maureen organizing a reunion this week?
11. Professionals have translated the Bible into many languages.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 57 2/25/08 11:00:04 AM

The passive form
·10 · of modal auxiliaries
The passive voice of modal auxiliaries is formed by the modal ⫹ be ⫹ past partici-
ple. This formation can be used to express the present and future tenses.
The door can’t be opened.
Children should be taught how to read poetry.
This package ought to be sent by tomorrow.
Fred has to be told about the meeting.
Jason was supposed to be informed about the changes.
The future tense

With some modals, the future tense is expressed with the auxiliary will.
Fred will have to be told about the meeting.
The past tense

The past tense of certain modal auxiliaries in the passive voice is formed by the
modal ⫹ have been ⫹ past participle.
The letter should have been sent yesterday!
This car must have been stolen two months ago.
Andrew ought to have been told about the meeting.
With other modal auxiliaries, the past tense of the modal is used together
with to be ⫹ past participle.
Fred had to be told about the meeting.
The door couldn’t be opened.
EXERCISE
10·1
Complete each sentence, using the correct forms of the verbs in
parentheses. For some sentences, more than one tense may be used.
EXAMPLE Tom may have already been given (may ⫹ already ⫹ give)
this card by one of his friends.
1. Ronald (should ⫹ tell) the good news

as soon as possible.
58
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 58 2/25/08 11:00:04 AM

2. Angela (should ⫹ drive) to the airport half an hour ago.
3. Someone (should ⫹ clean) the kitchen before dinner.
4. Butter (must ⫹ keep) in the refrigerator or it will
go bad.
5. We tried talking to him, but he
(could ⫹ not ⫹ convince). He had already made up his mind.
6. We tried, but we (could ⫹ not ⫹ open) the window.
7. I am so excited! IBM called me, and I (may ⫹ offer)
a job with them soon.
8. The computer firm that Stephanie interviewed with last week
(may ⫹ not ⫹ offer) her a job, even though
she had a good feeling about it.
9. I hope Bob accepts our job offer. He
(may ⫹ already ⫹ offer) a job with another company.
10. It might be too late to call her with an offer. Another competing company
(may ⫹ already ⫹ hire) her.
11. Peter didn’t expect to see his little brother at the party. He
(must ⫹ surprise) when he saw him drinking.
12. Today is the 8th, and his birthday was on the 2nd. Her birthday card
(should ⫹ send) a week ago.
13. His birthday is coming up next week. His present
(should ⫹ send) to his house soon.
14. Tricia (had better ⫹ clean) her room before Mom
gets back home.
15. Tricia, your room (had better ⫹ clean) by the time
I get home.
16. Tyler (have to ⫹ return) these videos by tomorrow
night.
17. These videos (have to ⫹ return) to the video store
by this afternoon.
18. There are too many people in this class. It
(ought to ⫹ divide) in two, but there are no more available classrooms.
19. Last semester’s class was too large. It
(ought to ⫹ divide) in half.
unit 10 The passive form of modal auxiliaries 59
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 59 2/25/08 11:00:05 AM

EXERCISE
10·2
Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verb in parentheses together
with an appropriate modal auxiliary or similar expression.
1. He is crying. He (be) sad.

2. The entire forest (see) from their balcony.
3. According to our teacher, all our calculators (put) into
our bags before she passes out the test.
4. A child (not ⫹ get) everything he asks for.
5. Your son draws quite poorly. His interest in painting
(not ⫹ encourage).
6. Five of the players on the team missed their plane. In my opinion, the game
(postpone).
7. Try to speak slowly when you give your lecture. Otherwise, some of your sentences
(misunderstand).
8. Some sightings of Elvis (not ⫹ explain).
9. She is wearing a ring on the fourth finger of her left hand. She
(marry).
10. I found a wallet on the table. It (left) by one of the
students who was having lunch.
11. What! You lost your final paper draft? Your professor
(displease) once you’ve told him about it.
12. He is very lazy. If you need him to do something, he
(push).
13. The classrooms in this school are old, but the municipality gave us money and a new
school (build) by next summer.
14. Blue whales (save) from extinction.
15. We can no longer sit here with our arms crossed! Something
(do)!
16. In my opinion, he (elect), because he is honest and
organized.
02 (33-60) ch 6-10.indd 60 2/25/08 11:00:06 AM

The stative passive ·11·
Past participles in a passive-voice sentence can act like adjectives, in the sense that
they describe a noun.
The car is old.
The car is locked.
In the first example, the word old is an adjective and describes car. In the
second example, locked is a past participle; it functions as an adjective and also
describes car.
Essentially, the participle is derived from passive-voice sentences like the
following.
The car has been locked by someone. (The car is locked.)
The window was repaired by someone. (The window is repaired.)
Adjectives and participles

The passive past participle can be used to describe an existing state or situation;
when it does, it is called the stative passive. Consider the following examples.
I locked the car door five minutes ago. Now the car door is locked.
Peter broke the window two days ago. Now the window is broken.
We were without water for a week. Now the pipe is finally fixed.
In all three examples, the action took place earlier, as described in the first sen-
tence, and the state of that action in the present is expressed in the second sen-
tence of each pair. In these second sentences, the past participle functions as an
adjective.
Notice that there is no by phrase in any of the sentences. However, the stative
passive is often followed by prepositions other than by.
She is satisfied with her job.
Marc is married to Vanessa.
There are many other common adjectives in English that are, in reality, stative
passive structures.
Frank is interested. I’m bored.
The store was closed. He saw nothing but closed stores.
The work was finished. He took the finished work home.
61
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 61 2/25/08 11:01:01 AM

Following is a list of commonly used adjectives that are derived from present and past
participles.
amazing/amazed
boring/bored
confusing/confused
disappointing/disappointed
exciting/excited
exhausting/exhausted
frightening/frightened
interesting/interested
satisfying/satisfied
surprising/surprised
terrifying/terrified
tiring/tired
The present participle is used as a modifier for the active voice. The past participle is used as
a modifier for the passive voice.
The athlete was amazing. (This adjective describes what the athlete is.)
The athlete was amazed. (This adjective describes what happened to the athlete.)
This book is boring. (This adjective describes what the book is.)
This student is bored. (This adjective describes what happened to the student.)
EXERCISE
11·1
Underline the correct participle in each sentence.
1. The journalist was disappointing 兩 disappointed that the newspaper didn’t accept her
article.
2. Tokyo is an exciting 兩 excited international city.
3. I am very interesting 兩 interested in astrology.
4. Reading good novels is gratifying 兩 gratified.
5. I am sorry for messing up the sauce. The recipe was really confusing 兩 confused.
6. Peter was also confusing 兩 confused when he read the instructions.
7. Susan is exciting 兩 excited, because she will see her parents soon.
8. Richard hoped that his family would be exciting 兩 excited to meet his new girlfriend.
EXERCISE
11·2
Complete each sentence, using the simple present or simple past tense of be with the
stative passive form of the verb in parentheses.
EXAMPLE It’s getting warm in here, because the heater is fixed (fix) again.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 62 2/25/08 11:01:02 AM

1. It smells bad in this kitchen, because the ventilator (break).
2. It is hot in this car, because the window (close).
3. Yesterday it was hot in this room, because the window (close).
4. Peter is wearing a winter hat. It (make) of cotton.
5. The door to the castle (shut).
6. Bob looks worried. He is sitting all by himself. His elbows (bend)
and his hands (fold) in front of him.
7. We can leave now, since the movie (finish).
8. The headlights on his car (turn) on.
9. This theater (not ⫹ crowd).
10. Don’t look under the stairs! Your Christmas present (hide) there.
11. Oh no! How did this happen? My dress (tear).
12. Where are my keys? They (go)! Did you take them?
13. Mother just called us, because dinner is ready. The table (set),
the chicken and beans (finish), and the candles
(light).
14. His room is finally looking cleaner. The bed (make), the floor
(vacuum), and the windows (wash).
15. We were trapped in a canyon for two days, because the car
(stick) in mud.
16. We are trapped here. The car (stick) in mud.
The progressive form vs. the stative passive

When the progressive form of be is used with past participles, the sentence is in the true passive
voice. It is only with the simple conjugation of be that a stative passive structure can exist. In addi-
tion, a by phrase is never used in a stative passive structure. Compare these sets of example
sentences.
PASSIVE The roof is being repaired by an experienced roofer.
STATIVE PASSIVE The roof is repaired.
PASSIVE The children were being spoiled by Uncle John.
STATIVE PASSIVE The children were spoiled.
PASSIVE The gas is being turned off by the repairman.
STATIVE PASSIVE The gas is turned off.
unit 11 The stative passive 63
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 63 2/25/08 11:01:02 AM

EXERCISE
11·3
Complete each sentence, using the appropriate form of be, if needed, and the
appropriate form of a verb in the list below.
block exhaust marry stick

confuse go plug in turn off
crowd insure qualify
divorce locate schedule
do lose spoil
1. The meeting for tomorrow at nine.

2. Let’s find another bar. This one too . It will take us
way too long to get a drink.
3. Excuse me. Could you give me directions? I .
4. Painting the house is hard work! I don’t know how much longer I can help you.
I . We need to rest and just finish up tomorrow.
5. I don’t understand the plot of this movie. I thought this was supposed to be a comedy,
not a horror movie. I .
6. Peter is probably sleeping. The light in his room .
7. Her house is very expensive. It for one million dollars.
8. I can’t open the garage door. It .
9. They were happily married for ten years, but now they .
10. I thought I had left my wallet on the table, but it’s not there. It .
I wonder where I could have left it.
11. Mr. Keller, I regret to inform you that you not for
the job. We need someone who is more eloquent and organized.
12. I adore Lisa. Every day I think to myself: “I to a wonderful
woman.”
13. Tell Jamie not to eat that fruit. It . Throw it away.
14. I am so tired of having to call the neighbor to move his truck. I am going to be late again
for work, because my car .
15. St. Thomas in the Virgin Islands.
16. The Internet connection doesn’t seem to be working on my computer either. Maybe it’s
the Ethernet cable. it ?
17. Sorry, the chicken not yet. I know you’re hungry,
but you’ll have to wait a little longer.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 64 2/25/08 11:01:03 AM

Prepositions
When certain past participles are used as adjectives in the stative passive, they are often combined
with specific prepositions. Following are some frequently used combinations.
accustom – to
acquaint – with
compose – of
cover – with
dedicate – to
devote – to
disappoint – in, with
dress – in
finish – with
interest – in
make – with
marry – to
oppose – to
relate – to
satisfy – with
scare – of
tire – of
When using one of these verbs in the static passive, the appropriate preposition must accom-
pany it.
The bride is dressed all in white.
I was tired of all his complaining.
EXERCISE
11·4
Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verb in parentheses plus
an appropriate preposition.
EXAMPLE A smoothie is made with fruit juice and ice. (make)
1. Water hydrogen and oxygen. (compose)

2. George Greek history. (interest)
3. He living on his own. (accustom)
4. My mom large dogs. (scare)
5. I the progress we have made this past week. (satisfy)
6. It’s autumn, and the country roads leaves. (cover)
7. We that policy. It’s unfair to the immigrant
workers. (oppose)
8. Josh Davis his composition. (finish)
9. Ruben Eleanor. (marry)
10. I not that author’s work. (acquaint)
11. She is in a bad mood, because she doing nothing. (tire)
unit 11 The stative passive 65
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 65 2/25/08 11:01:03 AM

12. Is your last name really Kennedy? you
the Kennedy family? (relate)
13. Steve works for an animal shelter. He his work. (dedicate)
14. The Chicago Bulls lost to a much weaker team. They
themselves. (disappoint)
15. I am not as brave as you think. I the noises in my own
house. (scare)
16. The administration improving public education. (dedicate)
17. Sarah and I each other. (devote)
18. Marc his best suit for his sister’s wedding. (dress)
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 66 2/25/08 11:01:03 AM

Past participles with get ·12·
Past participles can be used with the verb get. Get may be followed by a wide vari-
ety of adjectives and may occur in any tense, including in a progressive form.
I’m getting hungry. Let’s go pick up some food soon.
I stopped working, because I got dizzy.
You shouldn’t eat so much. You will get fat.
Following is a list of adjectives commonly used with get.
angry dizzy old
anxious empty sick
bald (very) far sleepy
better heavy tall
big hot thirsty
busy hungry warm
chilly late well
cold mad wet
dark nervous worse
In the structure get ⫹ past participle, the past participle functions as an
adjective; it describes the subject noun or pronoun of the sentence. Consider the
following examples.
They are getting engaged next week.
Dad got worried, because Lola was three hours late and didn’t bother to call.
Using get ⫹ past participle instead of be ⫹ past participle indicates a chang-
ing situation. The meaning of get in the above sentences is similar to the meaning
of become. Compare the examples above with the following.
They will become engaged next week.
Dad became worried, because Lola was three hours late and didn’t bother
to call.
This structure with get can occur in any tense.
PRESENT They get tired.
PRESENT PROGRESSIVE They are getting tired a lot lately.
PRESENT PERFECT They have gotten tired.
PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE They have been getting tired a lot lately.
PAST They got tired.
PAST PROGRESSIVE They were getting tired a lot lately.
PAST PERFECT They had gotten tired.
PAST PERFECT PROGRESSIVE They had been getting tired a lot lately.
67
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 67 2/25/08 11:01:03 AM

FUTURE They will get tired.
FUTURE PROGRESSIVE They will be getting tired after just a few minutes of exercise.
FUTURE PERFECT They will have gotten tired.
FUTURE PERFECT PROGRESSIVE They will have been getting tired after just a few minutes
of exercise.
All the tense forms are grammatically correct. Some, such as the future perfect progressive, are
avoided, however, because they sound awkward. A simpler tense is used in place of such awkward
phrases.
EXERCISE
12·1
Rewrite each sentence with the progressive form of the verb, adding a second
clause that provides an interruption of or an explanation for the continuous action.
Retain the tense of the original sentence.
EXAMPLE She got overtired.

She was getting overtired, because the heat was so intense.
1. No one gets hired.
2. Larry got annoyed.
3. His pay gets increased.
4. Younger candidates get elected.
5. He got fingerprinted.
EXERCISE
12·2
Complete each sentence with an appropriate form of get and the correct form
EXAMPLE The roofers were getting badly sunburned . (badly ⫹ sunburn)
1. I think I’ll stop jogging. I . (tire)

2. When they ? (marry)
3. We can head out to the discotheque as soon as you .
(dress)
4. He didn’t give us proper directions, so we . (lost)
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 68 2/25/08 11:01:04 AM

5. There was an explosion, but nobody . (hurt)
6. I finished painting for today. I . (tire)
7. How long did it take her to to living in Boston?
(accustom)
8. Sophie said she would call me at eight. It’s eleven, and she still hasn’t called me,
so I . (worry)
9. He , because everyone told him something
different. (confuse)
10. You’ll be able to play again. Don’t because you
lost. (upset)
11. I will meet up with them as soon as I . (do)
12. I easily, so I hardly ever finish watching movies. (bore)
13. Peter after losing his job, but now he is doing a little
better. (depress)
14. I’ll be ready to leave for the airport as soon as I . (pack)
15. I on Friday, so that’s when I’ll buy a new bed. (pay)
16. After Henry graduated from Harvard, he by a large
company, but later he , because he didn’t agree with
some of the business policies. (hire/fire)
17. I almost missed the deadline to turn in my thesis. I
with my last chapter until four in the morning. (not ⫹ finish)
18. First, he . Then, he .
After barely four years, he . (engage, marry, divorce)
unit 12 Past participles with get 69
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 69 2/25/08 11:01:04 AM

·13· Participial adjectives
Participles, besides being an important element of the progressive forms of tenses

(present participles) and of the passive voice (past participles), can also function
as adjectives. So far, you have encountered participles in passive structures or as
predicate adjectives. But they can also serve as adjectives that modify nouns
directly.
Present participles
Present participles are formed by adding the suffix -ing to the base form of the
verb (running, speaking, developing, and so on). The present participle conveys an
active meaning because the noun it modifies is “doing something.”
It is a confusing map. (The map confuses the driver, because it is not clear.)
It is a boring story. (The story bores the children.)
Past participles
Past participles are formed from both regular and irregular verbs. If the verb is
regular, the past participle has an -ed ending, identical to the simple past-tense
form.
call ⬃ called
interest ⬃ interested
load ⬃ loaded
ship ⬃ shipped
Irregular verbs form their past participles in a variety of ways. Some have a
vowel change in the base form of the word, and many end in -en.
break ⬃ broken
see ⬃ seen
speak ⬃ spoken
take ⬃ taken
Still others end in -t, and many of these have a vowel change as well.
bring ⬃ brought
dream ⬃ dreamed or dreamt
feel ⬃ felt
sleep ⬃ slept
70
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 70 2/25/08 11:01:04 AM

Some participles alter the appearance of the base form only slightly.
build ⬃ built
ran ⬃ run
say ⬃ said
And there are even past participles that are identical to the base form.
come ⬃ come
cut ⬃ cut
put ⬃ put
shut ⬃ shut
No matter how they are formed, past participles can be used as modifiers, but with a passive
meaning.
He is a confused driver. (The driver is confused by the map, because it is not clear.)
They are bored children. (The children are bored by the story.)
EXERCISE
13·1
For each verb, write its present participle and past participle.
1. sleep
2. invent
3. lose
4. destroy
5. compare
6. report
7. endanger
8. make
9. steal
10. slay
Understanding the difference between present participles (active meaning) and past partici-
ples (passive meaning) is important in order to form correct sentences with modifiers appropriate
to the meaning of the sentences. In the following pairs of examples, compare the difference in
meaning of the present participle with that of the past participle.
John was tearful when he saw what the damaging winds had done.
John was tearful when he saw all the damaged homes.
She observed the purifying action of the chemicals on the water.
She only drinks purified water.
unit 13 Participial adjectives 71
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 71 2/25/08 11:01:05 AM

EXERCISE
13·2
Rewrite each sentence, using the appropriate participial form of the verb in italics—
present participle or past participle. Change each sentence according to the example.
EXAMPLE The crowd is amused by the comedian.

They are an amused crowd.
1. The group of children is entertained by the circus clown.
2. The circus clown entertains the kids.
3. The class bores the students.
4. The students are bored by the class.
5. The accident frightens the woman.
6. The woman was frightened by the accident.
7. The girl was surprised by the loud noise.
8. The loud noise surprised the girl.
9. The hard work exhausted the men.
10. The men were exhausted.
EXERCISE
13·3
Complete each sentence with the present or past participle of the verb in parentheses.
1. The (borrow) tennis racket was returned to the tennis club.

2. The (terrify) civilians ran for their lives.
3. The sudden explosion was a (terrify) sight for the civilians.
4. Success is a (gratify) part of one’s work.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 72 2/25/08 11:01:05 AM

5. The (steal) paintings were recovered by the museum.
6. She found herself in an (embarrass) situation this morning.
7. A (damage) hurricane swept across Texas recently.
8. Workers are still in the process of repairing the (damage) streets.
9. I made my way through the (crowd) room.
10. He bought some (freeze) hot dogs at the supermarket.
11. The (injure) cat was taken to the animal shelter.
12. Parents have a (last) effect on their children.
13. I wasn’t able to open the (lock) door, so I don’t know what’s in
that room.
14. No one lives in that (desert) mansion. It was abandoned years ago.
unit 13 Participial adjectives 73
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 73 2/25/08 11:01:05 AM

·14 · Subject-verb agreement
Agreement means that two or more words must correspond with each other in
order to make proper sense of a sentence. For example, the gender and number of
a pronoun or possessive adjective must match the gender and number of the noun
it refers to. If you wish to say that a man wants to wear a new shirt he just bought,
you would say the following.
John is putting on his new shirt. (masculine singular subject /
masculine singular possessive adjective)
That meaning is lost if you change the gender or number of either the subject or
the possessive adjective.
Mary is putting on his new shirt.
John is putting on our new shirt.
The boys are putting on my new shirt.
The rules of agreement do not mean that these three examples are incorrect—they
could be. But in this case, they are not, because the desired meaning is that a man
wants to wear a new shirt he just bought: “He puts on his own shirt.”
Third-person singular and plural

In subject-verb agreement in the third person, the difference between a singular
and a plural subject is important. In most cases, a plural subject has a different
present-tense verb ending from a singular subject.
The boy plays tag in the street.
The boys play tag in the street.
She learns a lot about English.
They learn a lot about English.
When the auxiliary have is used in the present perfect tense, there is also a
difference between the singular and the plural.
My brother has been in Ireland for two weeks.
My parents have been in Ireland for two weeks.
Using a singular verb with a singular subject and a plural verb with a plural
subject is essential for writing and speaking correctly in English.
74
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 74 2/25/08 11:01:05 AM

EXERCISE
14·1
Underline the appropriate verb form in each sentence.
EXAMPLE There is 兩 are two magazines on the living room table.
1. There is 兩 are many reasons for voting.

2. Angela writes 兩 write lots of e-mails, but she doesn’t save any.
3. Peter and I was 兩 were playing poker the other night.
4. The people in Madrid is 兩 are very well dressed.
5. Susan’s mother always wakes 兩 wake her up in time for school.
6. My grandmother’s friends likes 兩 like to go to church at noon.
7. There was 兩 were many children playing in the park.
8. Does 兩 Do you like those movies?
9. Mother Teresa, Gandhi, and Camus was 兩 were socially engaged.
10. He is 兩 are a very good speaker.
Subject-verb agreement is essential, no matter what type of verb is involved. When aux-
iliaries are used, they must be conjugated to agree with the subject of the sentence.
A child is playing in the garden.
Many children are playing in the park.
Does the woman understand English?
Do the tourists understand French?
EXERCISE
14·2
Complete each sentence with an appropriate form of the verb in parentheses.
1. They (run) up and down the stairs when the accident took place.
2. My aunt (not ⫹ work) in a hair salon.
3. The house (have) a fence around it.
4. Our village’s huts (be) exotic.
5. Everybody (scream) really loudly.
unit 14 Subject-verb agreement 75
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 75 2/25/08 11:01:06 AM

The verb be
Be is the only English verb that has more than two forms in the simple present tense, which means
that agreement involves more than third-person singular and plural forms.
PRESENT SINGULAR PRESENT PLURAL
FIRST PERSON I am we are

SECOND PERSON you are you are
THIRD PERSON he/she/it is they are
In the past tense, it has two forms.

PAST SINGULAR PAST PLURAL
FIRST PERSON I was we were

SECOND PERSON you were you were
THIRD PERSON he/she/it was they were
If the subject of the verb be is a noun, the third-person form of the verb is used.
The boy is at school.
Mary and Jane were named co-chairpersons.
EXERCISE
14·3
Complete each sentence with the appropriate present-tense form of be.
1. I extremely tired.
2. You very noisy.
3. We from Rwanda.
4. They going to Merida.
5. He a pilot.
6. She always smiling.
7. It a photo of my grandparents.
Now, complete each sentence with the appropriate past-tense form of be.
8. I extremely tired.
9. You very noisy.
10. We living in Rwanda.
11. They going to Merida.
12. He a pilot.
13. She always smiling.
14. It a photo that belonged to my grandparents.
15. The barn destroyed during the hurricane.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 76 2/25/08 11:01:06 AM

Expressions of quantity
For many expressions of quantity, the verb form is determined by the noun or pronoun that fol-
lows the word of. If the phrase some of or most of is followed by a singular noun or pronoun, the
verb form is singular.
Some of the icing is runny.
Most of the equipment was sold.
But if these phrases—as well as many of—are followed by a plural noun, the verb form is plural.
Some of the movies are good.
Most of these people were in need of help.
Many of these people are my friends.
This concept applies to many other expressions of quantity.
One third of this land is mine.
Two thirds of the diamonds are mine.
A number of people miss the bus.
If the number is used instead of a number in such an expression, the verb form is singular,
because a specific number is being referred to.
The number of people on the bus is 52. (52 is the number of people.)
The number of people at the bar is 22. (22 is the number of people.)
Similarly, expressions with one of, each of, and every one of take a singular verb form.
One of my parents is about to get here.
Each one of my children is here.
Every one of my cousins is here.
In very formal English, subjects with none of are singular, but it is common to hear none of
used with a plural verb in casual speech.
FORMAL None of the boys is here.
CASUAL None of the boys are here.
EXERCISE
14·4
1. Every one of the soldiers is 兩 are required to pass the obstacle test.
2. Each girl on the team has 兩 have her own tennis racket.
3. One of my best friends is 兩 are suffering from migraines.
4. A lot of shoes on those racks is 兩 are on sale tomorrow.
5. A lot of women in the class is 兩 are active feminists.
6. Half of this strawberry cake belongs 兩 belong to you.
7. Half of the students in this course is 兩 are from Belgium.
8. Some of the kiwis I bought is 兩 are really sweet.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 77 2/25/08 11:01:06 AM

9. Some of the fruit I forgot in my car trunk is 兩 are rotting.
10. Every one of the parts is 兩 are closely examined for quality control.
11. None of the monkeys at the zoo is 兩 are free to run away. All of them is 兩 are locked
in small cages.
12. A number of firefighters is 兩 are off duty today.
13. The number of paintings at the museum is 兩 are 278.
14. One of the key elements in conflict resolution and peace is 兩 are honesty.
15. Does 兩 Do all the children have to take the test?
16. Does 兩 Do all of his clothes have to be packed by tomorrow?
17. Why was 兩 were some of the parents pulled aside?
18. Why was 兩 were the student brought in?
19. Does 兩 Do any of the workers know where the restaurant is?
20. What part of the human body is 兩 are most vulnerable?
21. What percentage of the North American population is 兩 are literate?
The expressions there is and there are are singular and plural, respectively. The noun or
pronoun that follows such an expression determines whether the verb is singular or
plural.
There is a man standing in the parkway.
There are men standing in the parkway.
There is someone I want you to meet.
EXERCISE
14·5
1. There is 兩 are hundreds of types of tea in China.

2. There is 兩 are a mosquito in my tent!
3. There is 兩 are many ways to get downtown.
4. There isn’t 兩 aren’t a message for you.
5. There is 兩 are a report on the incident.
6. There isn’t 兩 aren’t laws against free speech.
7. How many kinds of frogs is 兩 are there in South America?
8. Why isn’t 兩 aren’t there a public school in town?
9. There is 兩 are a ruler in my bag.
10. There is 兩 are some erasers and highlighters in my drawer.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 78 2/25/08 11:01:07 AM

Collective nouns
Occasionally, a noun ending in -s is singular. This is especially true of collective nouns and noun
phrases that are considered indivisible units.
The United States is an important country.
The news is televised.
The Maldives consists of 26 atolls.
The United Nations has five principal administrative bodies.
Macy’s is a department store.
Physics is a science.
Note that if such a noun is changed to a pronoun, the singular pronoun it is used. This is because
the noun is considered singular: The United Nations is one unit and is therefore replaced by it and
not by they or them.
This same concept can be applied to expressions of time, distance, and money.
Ten hours of flying is too long.
Thirty miles is the exact distance from here to there.
Fifty dollars is too expensive.
Note, however, that the nouns people and police are plural and take plural verb forms.
All those people are trapped inside their homes.
The police have intervened swiftly.
Finally, there are several adjectives preceded by the that are used as plural nouns.
The old are not well taken care of in this country.
The rich keep getting richer.
The wrongly accused deserve justice.
The injured and wounded lie about the battlefield.
Following is a list of other adjectives that are used as plural nouns.
the blind
the dead
the deaf
the handicapped
the living
the young
EXERCISE
14·6
1. Ten dollars is 兩 are a reasonable price for an ink pen.

2. Five minutes is 兩 are all the time allocated for the exam.
3. The number on that car’s license plate is 兩 are fake.
4. Mathematics is 兩 are used to calculate everything.
5. Physics tries 兩 try to explain motion.
6. Massachusetts is 兩 are 200 miles away from the border.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 79 2/25/08 11:01:07 AM

7. The news about the plane crash is 兩 are pretty alarming.
8. The United Nations is 兩 are an important international institution.
9. Many people in the world does 兩 do not own a home.
10. The police is 兩 are paid for by tax money and federal funds.
11. Many Japanese people likes 兩 like pop culture.
12. Portuguese is 兩 are similar to Spanish in pronunciation.
13. In horror movies, the living fears 兩 fear the dead.
14. Most people is 兩 are not allergic to bee stings.
15. The effect of the volcano’s eruption depends 兩 depend on how elevated it is.
16. There has 兩 have been some cases of bubonic plague in the south of the island.
EXERCISE
14·7
Complete each sentence with the correct simple present form of the verb in parentheses.
EXAMPLE Are (be) Ben and Tina excited about going to the movies?
1. (be) July and August the hottest months of the year in Houston?
2. The interest rates for the house loan (be) cheap, because it is a small
house.
3. A blue parrot and a yellow parrot (be) perched in the cage.
4. A yellow and blue car (be) parked in the driveway.
5. (do) most of the children take a nap after lunch?
6. (do) John’s dog always bark that loudly?
7. My spare key (be) in my back pocket.
8. Each dollar, quarter, dime, and cent (be) carefully accounted for in our
company.
9. Attentiveness to other people’s reactions (make) an efficient salesman.
10. One of my sisters (keep) a hairbrush in her purse at all times.
11. There (be) lots of horses competing in the race this year.
12. My neighbor (knock) on my door every morning at seven to wake
me up.
13. Almost one third of the land in the southwestern part of Montgomery County
(be) unsuitable for growing crops.
14. The economic and social center of the United States (be) New York.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 80 2/25/08 11:01:07 AM

15. Three hours of jogging (provide) plenty of exercise.
16. In many ways, the proposed constitutional amendment on digital information
(violate) freedom of speech.
17. A bicycle with no visible lights and no brakes (be) dangerous.
18. A number of parents from the association (plan) to protest.
19. Most of the news on the front page of the New York Times (be) about the
explosion that took place at the Jordanian embassy.
20. The number of Aztec artifacts found in the pyramid (be) 20.
21. Almost all of the historical records on the Carter family (be) fake.
22. Every day, there (be) more than 200 babies born in Missouri.
23. No news (be) good news.
24. Every member of this group (be) quite intelligent.
Auxiliary verbs
If a verb phrase contains an auxiliary verb, it is the auxiliary verb, and no other verbal element,
that must agree with the subject of the sentence. Examples with the auxiliary be follow.
SINGULAR PLURAL
he is singing they are singing

he is punished they are punished
he is used to it they are used to it
he is to be freed they are to be freed
he was speaking they were speaking
he was found guilty they were found guilty
Examples with the auxiliary have follow.

SINGULAR PLURAL
he has learned they have learned

he has been jogging they have been jogging
he has been arrested they have been arrested
he had been hurrying they had been hurrying
Examples with the auxiliary do follow.

SINGULAR PLURAL
Does he understand? Do they understand?

He does not understand. They do not understand.
He did not care. They did not care.
No matter how complicated the verb phrase is, only the auxiliary verb form agrees with the sub-
ject of the sentence. The other elements of the phrase remain the same.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 81 2/25/08 11:01:08 AM

Complex sentences
A dependent clause is called a relative clause when it begins with who, which, or that. When one
of these words is immediately followed by a verb phrase, the relative pronoun (who, which, that)
becomes the subject of the clause. Consider the following examples.
The man, who was walking down the street, was poor.
Peter usually eats macaroni and cheese, which is his favorite dish.
Do you see the plane that is flying away?
If who, which, or that is the subject of the relative clause, the verb must reflect the number of that
subject: singular or plural. If the antecedent of who, which, or that is singular, the relative pronoun
is singular. If the antecedent is plural, the relative pronoun is plural. And in both instances, the
verb will agree with the number of the antecedent and relative pronoun.
SINGULAR ANTECEDENT
The boy, who is throwing stones, is going to break a window.

The car, which is being built in Detroit, has GPS as a standard feature.
John found a pen that is made of silver.
PLURAL ANTECEDENT
The boys, who are throwing stones, are going to break a window.
The cars, which are being built in Detroit, have GPS as a standard feature.
Mary found two pens that are made of silver.
While who, which, or that can be the subject of the relative clause, whose cannot be a subject.
In this case, the subject of the clause is the noun that immediately follows whose.
He is the architect whose mother comes from a poor country.
In this sentence, the subject of the relative clause is mother and the verb is comes, the third-person
singular form that agrees with the singular noun mother. It is possible for whose to be used with a
plural subject.
He is the architect whose parents come from a poor country.
EXERCISE
14·8
Underline the antecedent(s) of who, which, or that in each sentence.
1. Frank plays tennis with Mark and Pamela, who are his best friends.
2. She works in Manhattan, which is the most densely populated borough in New York City.
3. People who live in a house are fortunate.
4. Do you see the cars that are parked at the end of this street?
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 82 2/25/08 11:01:08 AM

EXERCISE
14·9
1. The book that was 兩 were on the table is mine.

2. Tyler, who is 兩 are already finished with law school, is 22 years old.
3. Tour guides who talks 兩 talk too much are annoying.
4. The government must support people who is 兩 are poor.
5. Sophie ate the brownies that was 兩 were on the plate.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 83 2/25/08 11:01:08 AM

·15· Agreement with nouns
Pronouns replace nouns in a sentence. Like nouns, pronouns can act as the sub-
ject or the object of a sentence. A singular pronoun is used to replace a singular
noun.
A boy ran into the living room. He was looking for his toy.
Did you see the boy come in? Did you see him come in?
A plural pronoun is used to replace a plural noun.
Some children ran out to the garden. They were looking for Easter eggs.
They gave candy to some children. They gave candy to them.
Personal pronouns and collective nouns

When a collective noun refers to a single, impersonal entity, a singular pronoun
(such as it) is used.
My work team is large. It is composed of 20 analysts.
When a collective noun refers to a group of various individuals, a plural pro-
noun (such as they or them) is used.
That family is close and caring. They are always there to support each other.
EXERCISE
15·1
Complete each sentence with the appropriate singular or plural
pronoun and the appropriate form of the verb in parentheses,
where given. More than one correct answer may be possible.
EXAMPLE The chorus sang beautifully. They were (was 兩 were) given
a loud ovation.
1. The crowd was screaming throughout the concert.

(was 兩 were) more enthusiastic about the band
than I had expected.
2. The audience clapped loudly. Obviously, had
loved the show.
3. A polo team is relatively small. (doesn’t 兩 don’t)
have as many players as a rugby team.
84
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 84 2/25/08 11:01:08 AM

4. The basketball team felt discouraged, because had lost to the
opposing team.
5. I wrote a story on the average American family. During my research, I found out that
(is 兩 are) composed of about two children.
6. I have a wonderful group of co-workers. I enjoy working with
very much, and (appreciates 兩 appreciate) my work.
7. The fans became more and more excited as the game progressed.
began to chant and wave flags in the air.
8. The audience at the Philip Glass concert was huge. exceeded
20,000 people.
9. The marketing team is pretty large. (consists 兩 consist) of 32
research specialists, 5 accountants, 10 secretaries, and 2 managers.
10. Martha and David finally saved enough money to begin making payments on the new car
bought.
11. The research team is planning a trip to southern Mexico.
(is 兩 are) going to have fun.
12. There aren’t enough people registered for the course. (is 兩 are)
probably going to be canceled.
Noncount nouns
There is a group of English nouns that are neither singular nor plural and cannot be counted.
These nouns are referred to as noncount nouns.
The rule for using them is quite simple: When used as the subject of a sentence, a noncount
noun takes the third-person singular form of the verb.
The water tastes funny.
Sunshine makes me happy.
A noncount noun cannot be used with the indefinite article a/an, which means “one.” Compare
the following sentences.
CORRECT I drank the water.
CORRECT I drank water.
INCORRECT I drank a water.
Because it has an uncertain volume, water is a noncount noun. Therefore, the word a cannot be
used in the third sentence above, because water cannot be counted and is neither singular nor
plural. Following are examples of other noncount nouns used in sentences.
My professor gives us homework.
They borrowed furniture.
I have time to do the dishes.
We had money back then.
Los Angeles has traffic day and night.
She didn’t get mail.
unit 15 Agreement with nouns 85
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 85 2/25/08 11:01:09 AM

He wears jewelry.
Bruno sold clothes.
If a noun makes no sense when preceded by a/an, it is a noncount noun. However, certain other
words can be used to specify an indefinite quantity with this category of nouns, such as some,
little, a lot of, and much.
He bought some jewelry in an antique store.
I have little time for this.
Do they have a lot of money?
There’s too much furniture in this room.
A list of other common noncount nouns follows.
anger economics honesty rice
biology electricity humidity salt
bread experience love silver
cement fire luck snow
chalk fog meat sugar
cotton food peace violence
courage gold plastic wheat
darkness grass poverty wind
dirt gravity progress wood
dust heat rain wool
Some of these nouns can also be used with a/an when they are specific in meaning and not
used to express the general meaning of the noun.
SPECIFIC MEANING GENERAL MEANING
an experience I’ll never forget Experience is the best teacher.

a fire of catastrophic proportions Fire is so destructive.
a love of raw nature I just want love.
a lasting peace May you live in peace.
a silver of exceptional purity There is silver in this mine.
EXERCISE
15·2
Fill in the blank after each expression of quantity with an appropriate noun.
If both a regular noun and a collective noun can be used with the quantity,
give an example of each.
EXAMPLE a lot of problems / time
1. a few 5. a little
2. many 6. six
3. several 7. much
4. some 8. little
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 86 2/25/08 11:01:09 AM

EXERCISE
15·3
Underline the verb form that correctly completes each sentence.
1. The problem is 兩 are that oil has become too expensive in the last few years.
2. I find that the homework is 兩 are usually too easy.
3. You should be certain that the water is 兩 are drinkable.
4. I will feel more secure if her money stays 兩 stay in the bank.
5. When I saw that my clothing was 兩 were so white, I was happy with the cleaning service.
EXERCISE
15·4
Underline the word or phrase that correctly completes each sentence.
1. The new puppy has brought me much 兩 many happiness.

2. Jerusalem is like other major cities that have much 兩 many traffic.
3. Last night at the party, I met a little 兩 some people who spoke French.
4. Cuba is great. There are many beaches to discover, and there is 兩 are plenty of
entertainment.
5. Reading is good. I have gotten much 兩 many knowledge from books, and I have learned
about all sorts of things.
6. I bought four bread 兩 loaves at the supermarket.
7. Even after paying for the movie rental, he still had a few 兩 a little money to spend.
8. They are among the few 兩 much people to have survived.
9. I think it is rather strange that we don’t hear much 兩 many news from them anymore.
10. We have all probably made a little 兩 a few progress in English spelling.
Indefinite pronouns
In formal English, a singular personal pronoun or possessive adjective is used to refer to an indef-
inite pronoun. Indefinite pronouns are those that do not refer to a specific person, for example,
anybody, somebody, and everyone.
Somebody left his/her keys on the counter.
Everyone has his/her own way of doing things.
In informal English, a plural personal pronoun is often used to refer to an indefinite
pronoun.
Somebody left their keys on the counter.
Everyone has their own way of doing things.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 87 2/25/08 11:01:09 AM

Following is a list of the most common indefinite pronouns.
anybody
anyone
anything
everybody
everyone
everything
nobody
no one
nothing
somebody
someone
something
EXERCISE
15·5
Underline the verb form that correctly completes each sentence.
1. Something was 兩 were making scary noises up in the attic.

2. The police spoke to each person who was 兩 were at the crime scene.
3. Almost every student who studies 兩 study at the library gets more work done.
4. Nobody from the crime scene wants 兩 want to answer the policewoman’s questions.
5. Someone is 兩 are responsible for this error.
6. Almost everybody in my office drinks 兩 drink coffee in the morning.
EXERCISE
15·6
Fill in the blank with an appropriate pronoun or possessive adjective. If a choice of verbs
is provided, write in the correct one. More than one correct answer may be possible.
EXAMPLE When an artist wants to paint, she should try to find inspiration.
1. Anyone can learn how to play guitar if (wants 兩 want) to.

2. Doctors diagnose patients, but (is 兩 are) not allowed to operate
on you if they are not trained.
3. Each player on our soccer team has to spend three hours a day lifting weights,
a process during which (builds 兩 build) stamina following the directions
of trainer.
4. A politician has two primary responsibilities. should respect the popular
vote, and should avoid war at all costs.
5. If Alex wants to read, should try to find a quiet place.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 88 2/25/08 11:01:10 AM

6. Someone forgot jacket. I wonder who it belongs to.
7. Everyone who came to the party brought own drink.
8. I wonder whose book this is. I should look inside the front cover to check if
wrote name or phone number.
9. A dog can do cool tricks if (is 兩 are) taken care of and properly trained.
10. John’s hamster is called Wooblee Beeboo. (is 兩 are) very noisy.
recognizes John only if notices that John has food
in hand.
Complex nouns
Complex nouns are phrases that combine a head noun with a subordinate noun. The head noun
is the subject of the sentence and determines the form of the verb. The subordinate noun is the
object of the preposition of; the of phrase follows the head noun and completes the meaning of
the subject. The phrase the glasses of wine consists of the head noun glasses, the preposition of, and
the subordinate noun wine.
The glasses of wine are on the bar.
A plural verb (are) is required in this sentence, because the subject (glasses) is plural. If the noun
phrase has a singular subject, the verb form is singular.
A bottle of wine is in the cooler.
EXERCISE
15·7
Fill in the blank with a verb form or expression of quantity that makes sense.
EXAMPLES Each of the boys has been given a dollar.

Chicago has many kinds of ethnic neighborhoods.
1. The cans of food in the trunk.

2. One of the students studying.
3. Ten loaves of bread needed to make the sandwiches.
4. There several types of entertainment in Madagascar.
5. My sister doesn’t drink cups of coffee in the afternoon, because it keeps
her awake at night.
6. That an unexpected piece of news.
7. Large avenues have lanes to clear out traffic.
03 (61-89) ch 11-15.indd 89 2/25/08 11:01:10 AM

·16 · Using other
Forms of other are used as either adjectives or pronouns. These forms distinguish
singular from plural, both as adjectives and pronouns.
Adjectives
The adjective another is used to modify singular nouns. Its plural counterpart,
other, is used to modify plural nouns, noncount nouns, and collective nouns.
Another means “one more of something” or “something different.” Other means
“more things or persons” or “different things or persons.”
I want another piece of cake, please. (one more)
I don’t like this apple. I’d prefer another apple. (a different one)
We met the other guests at the party. (more of them)
They’re strange. I’d rather meet the other guests. (different ones)
Some books were interesting. Other books were quite boring.
(different ones)
I like this wine, but I think the other wine is better. (different noncount)
Other and the other can modify plural nouns. They are different only in that the
other is more specific. But be aware that the other can also modify singular
nouns.
Some plants are wilted. Other plants seem to be thriving.
( plural, others in general)
These trees need to be sprayed. The other trees look healthy.
(plural, specific others)
This rose bush needs trimming. The other rose bush is perfect. (singular)
Another is also used with expressions of money, time, and distance; in these
cases, it means “an additional.” Even though many of these expressions are plural,
another is the appropriate modifier.
This is not enough. We need another hundred euros.
She will live in this house for another six weeks.
They had to walk another five miles to get here.
Every other indicates alternating items in a series, for example, counting by
even numbers: two, four, six, eight, and so on.
Please respond to every other question. (numbers one, three, five, seven)
I speak to my brother every other day. (Monday, Wednesday, Friday)
90
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 90 2/25/08 11:01:50 AM

EXERCISE
16·1
Fill in the blank with an appropriate noun phrase.
EXAMPLE another meeting of the board of directors
1. another
2. another
3. another
4. another
5. other
6. other
7. other
8. other
Pronouns
The pronominal form of another is another or another one. It replaces a phrase in which the adjec-
tive another modifies a singular noun. If the other is used to modify a singular noun, it changes to
the other one when the noun is replaced.
Do you want another cup of coffee? Do you want another?
I can’t deal with another problem. I can’t deal with another one.
Give the boy another quarter. Give the boy another one.
The other novel is far better. The other one is far better.
The pronominal form of other is others. It replaces a phrase in which the adjective other modifies
a plural noun.
Some tourists brought cameras. Others just bought postcards of the scene.
Many people are worried about the problem. Others just don’t care.
To be more specific, the others is used.
A few runners made it to the finish. The others dropped out an hour ago.
Some of the guests got drunk. The others just watched them in amusement.
The following example sentences illustrate various uses of the forms of other.
One conference speaker is from California. Another speaker is from Boston.
Other speakers are from Chicago. Still others are from New York.
I have four Lou Reed records. Three are mine, and I bought them last week. The other record
is his. But I only have three David Bowie records. The one with the psychedelic cover is
mine. The other records are yours.
Each other and one another express reciprocity.
We e-mail each other every morning.
We write to one another every afternoon.
unit 16 Using other 91
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 91 2/25/08 11:01:50 AM

EXERCISE
16·2
Complete each sentence with an appropriate form of other.
EXAMPLE Take these two shirts. This one is for your mom, and the other is for
your dad.
1. This cookie is for you, and one is for my sister.

2. There are many modes of transportation. The bus is one way. are
the car, the bicycle, and the motorcycle.
3. I would like to write more about this topic. Do you have book I could
borrow from you to learn more about it?
4. I would like some more books on the topic. Do you have any that
you could lend me?
5. She invited three people over for dinner. Of those three people, only Marie and Sebastian
can come. person can’t come.
6. Look at your feet. One is your right foot, and is your left foot.
7. Look at your hand. You have five fingers. One is your pinky. is your
ring finger. is your middle finger. finger is your
index finger. And is your thumb.
8. I got three e-mails. One was from my aunt. one was from my
girlfriend, who is studying in Korea. e-mail was from my friend Tyler.
9. There are two children sitting at the bus stop. One is Christopher, and
is Richard, my son.
10. Monica reads The Economist every week. She doesn’t read any
magazine.
11. Some people prefer hip-hop, but prefer rap music.
12. Mr. and Mrs. Kuichi are a happily married couple. They respect .
They support . They enjoy being with .
13. She will graduate in two years.
14. I’m almost done. I just need two hours.
15. There are two ways to get to the island. The plane is one means of transportation.
The boat is .
16. The country has two basic problems. One is corruption, and
is rampant inflation.
17. Some people are loud; are quiet. Some people are outspoken;
are shy. Some people are smart; are not
so smart.
18. Most of the children have arrived, and I am sure will be here soon.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 92 2/25/08 11:01:51 AM

19. Thank you for inviting me to go swimming. I’d really like to accept, but I already have
plans.
20. They have three girls. One of them is in high school and still has year
to go before she graduates. is about to go to college.
is about to finish her doctorate.
21. One of the countries I’d like to visit is Hungary. is Russia. Of course,
besides those two countries, there are many I’d like to visit.
22. Three countries border Spain. One is France. is Portugal.
is Andorra.
23. I have been to only three cities since I came to Italy. One is Rome, and
are Turin and Florence.
24. When his alarm rang in the morning, he hit the snooze button, closed his eyes, and went
back to sleep for ten minutes.
25. Patrick and I have been friends for a long time. We’ve known since
we were kids.
26. It’s a long drive. I’m already tired of being in the car, and we still have
800 miles to go.
27. Prices continually rise. Next year, a pound of fruit will cost three
or four dollars more than it does now.
unit 16 Using other 93
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 93 2/25/08 11:01:51 AM

·17· Gerunds
Gerunds are verb forms that function as nouns. They are formed by adding the
suffix -ing to the base form of the verb: talking, running, building, developing, and
so on.
Gerunds can function as subjects or objects.
GERUND AS SUBJECT
Working has never been John’s strong point.

Swimming is really great exercise.
GERUND AS OBJECT
I enjoy working at the plant, but I prefer gardening.

She always liked knitting and has made a good business out of it.
EXERCISE
17·1
Complete each sentence with an appropriate gerund.
EXAMPLES I don’t care for boating .

I don’t care for dancing .
1. My sister never liked .

My sister never liked .
2. The boys were interested in .
The boys were interested in .
94
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 94 2/25/08 11:01:51 AM

Distinguishing gerunds from present participles
Although gerunds look like present participles, they function in a different way. Present partici-
ples are typically part of a progressive verb phrase and follow the auxiliary verb be. Gerunds are
only used as nouns.
PRESENT PARTICIPLES
She was cooking and cleaning all day long. (past progressive)
Tom and Marie have been jogging for over an hour. (present perfect progressive)
GERUNDS
Jogging is always healthy. (subject)

Dad had to do the cooking and cleaning by himself. (direct object)
The possessive
In formal English, a noun or pronoun preceding a gerund is in the form of a possessive.
We appreciated Tara’s letting us use her phone.
I never liked his dating that girl.
In casual English, however, an object form of a noun or pronoun quite commonly precedes a
gerund.
We appreciated Tara letting us use her phone.
I never liked him dating that girl.
Although the direct object ⫹ gerund construction is heard with great frequency, the posses-
sive construction is preferred.
I was very annoyed by William’s driving so recklessly.
We were all so proud of Linda’s winning the race.
I couldn’t bear the child’s crying.
Julian’s sister did not approve of his drinking.
They all hated my singing and especially my dancing.
A word of caution: If a verb form ending in -ing precedes a noun, the verb form is a
present participle, because its function in that position is as a modifier of the noun.
The other soldiers were distracted by William’s twitching muscles.
They all hated his reverberating baritone.
EXERCISE
17·2
Underline the gerund(s) in each sentence.
1. Moving to a new city is always stressful.

2. Mentioning this to Paul would be very clumsy.
3. She is looking forward to meeting him in person.
4. Managing this store is becoming too overwhelming.
5. We enjoy walking in the countryside and swimming in rivers.
unit 17 Gerunds 95
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 95 2/25/08 11:01:52 AM

EXERCISE
17·3
Fill in the blank with the appropriate gerund form of the verb in parentheses.
1. They warned me that (reach) the top of the mountain would take
several days.
2. (Decide) where to keep our old winter boots was not too difficult.
3. The policeman’s job is (protect) citizens and
(serve) the law.
4. Laura does not seem to have time to do anything but (study) and
(stay) out late with her friends.
5. I made a living by (paint) houses and (repair)
roofs.
6. Rehearse (sing) that song with your professor; otherwise, you’ll never
get better.
7. She cannot ask her parents to keep her dog without (alert) them
to her vacation plans.
8. (Listen) to Paco de Lucía playing acoustic guitar was amazing.
9. (Stretch) has always been my favorite form of relaxation.
10. (Rhyme) and (dance) are crucial elements
of hip-hop culture.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 96 2/25/08 11:01:52 AM

Conjunctions ·18 ·
Conjunctions connect words, phrases, and clauses. But not all conjunctions func-
tion in the same way. This unit describes the types of English conjunctions and
how they are used in sentences.
Coordinating conjunctions
Coordinating conjunctions connect words or groups of words of the same gram-
matical type, such as verbs, nouns, and adjectives, or of the same grammatical
structure, such as phrases and clauses. These are the coordinating conjunctions:
and, but, or, yet, for, so, and nor.
If a coordinating conjunction connects more than two elements, it is gener-
ally placed between the last two elements of the series. The other elements are sep-
arated by commas.
In order to find the treasure, you will need a compass, a shovel, a map,
and a lamp.
He wanted to buy a hat, a pair of gloves, or some new boots.
Coordinating conjunctions can also connect other elements, such as infini-
tives and infinitive phrases.
She wants to watch a movie or (to) listen to music.
It’s difficult to listen to him and to know that he is lying.
If a coordinating conjunction connects independent clauses, the conjunction
is usually preceded by a comma. An independent clause is one that can stand by
itself and make complete sense. If a coordinating conjunction connects indepen-
dent clauses, it creates a compound sentence.
She spoke to him harshly, but there was real pity for him in her heart.
Tom was exhausted, yet he found enough strength to lead them out of the
woods.
If the subject, verb, or auxiliary is the same in both clauses, the one in the
second clause can be omitted. When this occurs, the comma can be omitted.
He spoke slowly but [he] pronounced each word in anger.
The men worked on the house and [worked] on the shed in the backyard.
Someone is knocking at the door and [is] calling your name.
97
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 97 2/25/08 11:01:52 AM

Conjunctions and their meaning
But and yet indicate a contrast between the elements they connect.
His knee was hurting, but he finished the race anyway.
The grape juice was bitter yet hydrating.
Or indicates a choice or offers alternatives between the elements it connects.
On Sunday, we will go to the lake or to the river.
He wants a new bicycle or some roller skates for Christmas.
Nor typically connects negative statements. Note that if an independent clause follows nor,
its subject and verb are inverted.
They did not fix my camera, nor did they fix my lens.
She did not tell us where she was traveling to, nor did she tell us how long she would be gone.
The conjunction for is generally synonymous with because. So has a meaning similar to
therefore. For and so can also express a cause-and-effect relationship.
She could not think clearly, for her heart was so full of anger.
They could not find the car keys, so they broke the window to get in.
EXERCISE
18·1
Fill in the blank with an appropriate word or words. Then, combine each group
of sentences into one sentence, using a coordinating conjunction. Use appropriate
punctuation.
EXAMPLE The concert was crowded. The concert was loud. The concert was fun .
The concert was crowded, loud, and fun.
1. The car was small. The car was dirty. The car was .
2. The country lane was narrow. The country lane was long. The country lane was
.
3. I dislike living downtown because of the noise. I dislike living downtown because of the
crime. I dislike living downtown because of the .
4. The Dominican Republic has . The Dominican Republic has palm trees.
The Dominican Republic has pretty beaches. The Dominican Republic has tropical birds.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 98 2/25/08 11:01:53 AM

5. I like to become acquainted with people from other countries. I like to become acquainted
with customs from other countries. I like to become acquainted with
from other countries.
EXERCISE
18·2
Combine each group of sentences into one sentence, using a coordinating conjunction.
Remember that using a coordinating conjunction allows you to omit repeated words.
EXAMPLE Peter is staying home. Peter is sleeping.

Peter is staying home and sleeping.
1. Susan washed the dishes. Susan put the food away.
2. Peter opened the door. Peter greeted the guests.
3. Ralph is painting the garage door. Ralph is cleaning the brushes.
4. Simon is generous. Simon is handsome. Simon is intelligent.
5. Please try to make less noise. Please try to have some respect for others.
6. She gave him chocolates on Monday. She gave him a CD on Tuesday. She gave him
a bracelet on Wednesday.
7. While we were in Los Angeles, we went to a concert. While we were in Los Angeles,
we ate Mexican food. While we were in Los Angeles, we visited old friends.
8. I should have finished my project. I should have cleaned my car.
9. He preferred to play poker. Sometimes he preferred to spend time in museums.
10. I like water. I don’t like soda.
unit 18 Conjunctions 99
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 99 2/25/08 11:01:53 AM

EXERCISE
18·3
Complete each sentence with the appropriate coordinating conjunction.
1. Jean-Paul Sartre wrote theatrical plays literary essays.

2. The water levels were rising, we had to climb on top of the roof.
3. She is beautiful, her personality is cold.
4. You must wear a jacket in Boston in the winter, you will catch a cold.
5. They asked us to come in, we said no.
6. John did not have money, did Barbara.
7. Patrick Rebecca were standing in the living room.
8. She went downstairs opened the door.
Correlative conjunctions
Correlative conjunctions follow the same set of rules coordinating conjunctions do. Both types
of conjunctions function in the same way, except that correlative conjunctions are composed of
two parts. The most common of these conjunctions are both . . . and . . . , not only . . . but also . . . ,
either . . . or . . . , and neither . . . nor . . . .
When two subjects are connected by not only . . . but also . . . , either . . . or . . . , or nei-
ther . . . nor . . . , the subject that is closer to the verb determines whether the verb is singular or
plural. However, when two subjects are connected with both . . . and . . . , the verb is always
plural.
Not only my sister but also my cousin is here.
Not only my sister but also my parents are here.
Either the cops or the robber was blamed for the victim’s death.
Either my sister or my parents were in attendance.
Neither my sister nor my cousin is here.
Neither my sister nor my parents are here.
Both my sister and my cousin are here.
Both the winter and the spring have been cold and damp.
These examples illustrate correlative conjunctions used with the subjects of the sentences. They
can also be used to join objects in a sentence.
He teased both my sister and my cousin.
She bought not only a new blouse but also a new skirt.
I spoke to either your wife or your daughter.
We saw neither the crime nor the criminal.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 100 2/25/08 11:01:53 AM

EXERCISE
18·4
Complete each sentence with is or are.
1. Both the coach and the player present.

2. Neither the coach nor the player present.
3. Not only the coach but also the players present.
4. Not only the coach but also the player present.
5. Either the players or the coach using the weight room.
6. Either the coach or the players using the weight room.
EXERCISE
18·5
Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence, using a correlative conjunction.
1. She does not have a pen. She does not have a ruler.
2. The giant panda faces extinction. The white tiger faces extinction.
3. We could drive. We could take the bus.
4. She wants to buy a Honda. She wants to buy a Toyota.
5. We can fix dinner for them at home. We can take them to a restaurant.
6. Joseph is absent. Peter is absent.
7. Joe is not in class today. Pedro is not in class today.
8. You can have tea. You can have coffee.
9. Roger enjoys playing Nintendo. Sam enjoys playing Nintendo.
10. The President’s press secretary will not confirm the story. The President’s press secretary
will not deny the story.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 101 2/25/08 11:01:53 AM

11. Coal is a nonrenewable natural resource. Petroleum is a nonrenewable natural resource.
12. Bird flu is a dangerous disease. Malaria is a dangerous disease.
13. Her parents don’t know where she is. Her boyfriend doesn’t know where she is.
14. According to the weather report, it will rain tomorrow. It will be windy tomorrow.
EXERCISE
18·6
Underline the conjunction(s) in each sentence.
1. He did not know whether he was on the right street or completely lost, for night was
coming and the streets were getting dark.
2. She was hungry and wanted either a cup of water or a glass of lemonade.
3. The movie was not only interesting but beautiful, and it inspired me.
4. Neither argument nor begging would change the jury’s verdict, but the defendant
appealed the case.
5. Both the teacher and the students were eager to see the play, but unfortunately it was
sold out.
Complete sentences are separated by a period, not a comma.

It was very cold. He put on a sweater.
We borrowed some money. We bought a used car.
However, you can use a comma before a coordinating conjunction to combine two sentences
into a single sentence. If the subjects of the two sentences are identical, the subject of the second
sentence can be omitted. In such a case, the comma is not used.
It was very cold, and he put on a sweater.
We borrowed money and bought a used car.
If the sentences are very short, the comma can be omitted.
The concert ended and he left.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 102 2/25/08 11:01:54 AM

EXERCISE
18·7
Punctuate the following sentences, adding commas and periods and capitalizing letters
where necessary. If a sentence needs no changes, mark it with an X.
1. The men walked the boys ran.

2. Sylvia came to the meeting her brother stayed home.
3. Sylvia came to the meeting but her brother stayed home.
4. The professor spoke and the students listened.
5. The professor spoke the students listened.
6. His academic record was outstanding yet he was not accepted into Harvard.
7. Her academic record was outstanding she was not accepted into Harvard but she was
not too unhappy about it.
8. We had to go to the grocery store for some milk and bread.
9. We had to go to the grocery store for there was nothing to eat in the fridge.
10. A barometer measures air pressure a thermometer measures temperature.
11. The Egyptians had good sculptors archeologists have found marvelous statues buried
in the pyramids.
12. Murdock made many promises but he had no intention of keeping them he was known
to be a liar.
13. I always enjoyed studying geography in high school so I decided to pursue it in college.
14. Cecilia is in serious legal trouble for she had no car insurance at the time of the accident.
15. Last night, Marie had to study for an exam so she went to a coffeehouse.
16. The team of scientists has not finished analyzing the virus yet their work will not be
published until later this year.
17. You have nothing to fear for they are strong and united.
18. She threw the book out the window she had failed the exam again so she’d ruined her
chances of bringing up her grade in the class.
19. Sophia struggled to keep her head above water she tried to yell but the water kept getting
in her mouth.
20. The hurricane was devastating tall buildings crumbled and crashed to the ground.
21. It was a wonderful day at the park the children swam in the river collected rocks and
insects and laughed all day the older kids played soccer the adults prepared the food
supervised the children and played cards for a short while.
22. Caterpillars eat plants and can cause damage to some crops but adult butterflies feed
primarily on flowers and do not cause any harm.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 103 2/25/08 11:01:54 AM

23. Both Jesse and I had many errands to do this morning Jesse had to go to the post office
and the bookstore I had to go to the pharmacy the video store and the bank.
24. The butterfly is extraordinary it begins as an ugly caterpillar and turns into something
colorful it almost looks like a piece of art.
Subordinating conjunctions
Subordinating conjunctions connect dependent, or subordinate, clauses to independent clauses.
An independent clause can stand alone as a complete sentence. A dependent clause requires an
independent clause to be correct or even to make sense. Furthermore, a dependent clause always
begins with a subordinate conjunction.
Following is a list of the most common subordinating conjunctions.
after because if unless
although before now that until
as even if since when
as if even though than where
as though except though while
They will head home after they finish eating.
She enjoyed talking to him, because he was so smart.
Tom will not join the team unless he can be the captain.
Several subordinating conjunctions express time relationships: after, before, until, when, and
while. These conjunctions indicate when the action of the dependent clause takes place in relation
to the action of the independent clause.
He was a doctor before becoming a veterinarian.
Pedro waited in line while Vanessa looked for a place to sit.
The subordinating conjunction because introduces a clause that provides a reason for some-
thing. It answers the question “why.”
She loves the Doors, because they sing catchy songs.
The subordinating conjunctions (ever) since and now that express one of two things: an
explanation or a time relationship.
They cannot go to Mexico, since they do not have enough money.
We have been eager to watch the movie ever since we saw the preview.
Now that they have enough money, they are going to Mexico.
Although, even though, and though express exception or indicate that a condition exists de-
spite some other condition.
She liked her old apartment, although it was small and smelly.
I was good at volleyball, even though I was short.
I hated his choice of music, though his voice was quite good.
When it follows a negative statement, the conjunction unless expresses requirements or
conditions.
She can’t be part of the band unless she sings well.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 104 2/25/08 11:01:54 AM

The dependent if clause expresses a condition that must be met, and the independent clause
describes what will happen when that condition is met.
He can be part of the band if he plays guitar or drums.
No punctuation is required before many subordinating conjunctions, especially those

that express a time relationship, if the conjunction follows the independent clause.
Before he became a professional surfer, he was a skater.
He was a skater before he became a professional surfer.
The relative pronouns who, whom, that, which, and whose can also function like subordinat-
ing conjunctions, because they introduce dependent clauses.
The conjunction than may be used as a subordinating conjunction, often introducing an
elliptical clause, that is, a clause in which information that is understood is omitted.
You speak English far better than I [do].
I like apple pie better than [I like] chocolate cake.
Colloquially, it is quite common to use than as a preposition.
Cathy is more talented than him.
My brother plays the piano better than me.
To be more precise, the verb in the dependent clause may be included, which requires than
to be treated as a conjunction.
Cathy is more talented than he is.
My brother plays the piano better than I do.
EXERCISE
18·8
Complete each sentence with the appropriate subordinating conjunction.
1. I really liked my old apartment, it was small and poorly lit.

2. You must buy a ticket you can walk into the theater and watch a movie.
3. She will have to wait the nurse calls her name to see the doctor.
4. He appreciates my mom’s cooking skills, she always makes good dishes.
5. They used to be friends they had an argument.
6. Let’s make a cake! You mix in the sugar I beat the eggs.
7. They cannot cross the river, they don’t have a boat.
8. He was a great musician, he was partly deaf.
9. The musician kept handing out his demo he finally got signed by
a music label.
10. She must be rich, she wears a lot of expensive jewelry.
11. Everyone likes Sophia, she is generous and friendly.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 105 2/25/08 11:01:54 AM

12. My father never answers his phone I will try to call him.
13. Fortunately, the tennis tournament was over the cold weather began.
14. You may have that puppy you promise to take care of it.
15. Jason is older she is by two weeks.
16. I’ll finish cleaning the dishes the news is over.
17. My dad was supportive of my academic choices he had reservations.
18. The federal government will raise taxes budget cuts can save enough money.
EXERCISE
18·9
Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence using until.
EXAMPLE He can’t use his computer. He hasn’t bought a computer monitor yet.
He can’t use his computer until he buys a computer monitor.
1. They can’t leave. They have to feed the cats first.
2. Tell me the truth. I am not going to leave this room.
3. He can’t pay his parking ticket. He hasn’t received his paycheck.
4. Finally, Steve arrived. Before that, it had been a boring conversation.
5. When I go to bed at night, I like to read. After a while, I get sleepy.
EXERCISE
18·10
Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence using now that, eliminating
explanatory phrases if they are not necessary.
EXAMPLE We have to wear swimsuits. We had been shopping at the mall, but we’re
at the beach now.
Now that we’re at the beach, we have to wear swimsuits.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 106 2/25/08 11:01:54 AM

1. Patrick used to share an apartment with a friend, but a couple of weeks ago he moved
into a house. Now he can use his own furniture.
2. I’ve finally finished painting the kitchen. Now I can go running.
3. They have to wear warm clothes. It’s winter now.
4. He just celebrated his 21st birthday. Now he can legally drink.
5. Charles used to ride his bike to school, but last month he bought a Jeep. Now he can
drive to school.
6. The civil war has ended. A new government is being formed.
7. It’s been a long, hard month, but the project is finally over. We can relax.
8. Do you want to go swimming? The water has gotten warmer.
9. My best friend got married this morning. He’s a married man now, so he has more
responsibilities.
10. I can get a job as a translator. I know English now.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 107 2/25/08 11:01:55 AM

Adverbs that act as conjunctions
Conjunctive adverbs are also considered conjunctions, because they can be used to connect
independent clauses. They also act as adverbs, because they modify one of the independent
clauses.
Following is a list of the most commonly used conjunctive adverbs.
afterwards for example nevertheless therefore
anyway for instance next thus
besides however now unfortunately
consequently instead otherwise
eventually later still
finally likewise then
The car engine broke down; consequently, we did not finish the race.
I spent the day at the public library; later, I went for a walk to relax.
The thief lost his appeal; therefore, he was forced to go to prison.
She had a lot of bills this month; unfortunately, that means that she can’t go on the trip
with us.
EXERCISE
18·11
Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence using a conjunctive adverb.
EXAMPLE The young man was single for years. He met the girl of his dreams.
The young man was single for years; finally, he met the girl
of his dreams.
1. We stopped to visit our grandparents on our way to Oklahoma. We stayed with friends
in Tulsa.
2. We had planned to go to the park today. The rain canceled our plans.
3. It was a difficult time for her. She learned a lot from the experience.
4. The hotel stayed vacant and abandoned for many years. The city council decided
to tear it down.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 108 2/25/08 11:01:55 AM

5. They had a romantic walk along the river. They went back to the hotel to drink some
champagne.
6. Mr. Williams cannot speak at the conference. Mr. Rogers will go in his place.
7. We enjoy all kinds of outdoor activities. We really like rock climbing.
8. The mall is already closed. You do not have any money to spend.
9. The essay must be written by Monday. You fall behind schedule.
10. Anna Nicole Smith was incredibly rich. She did not have a happy life.
11. They spent their entire afternoon shopping for clothes. They wore some of their
purchases to the dance.
12. He likes seafood. He is allergic to oysters.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 109 2/25/08 11:01:55 AM

·19· Prepositions
Prepositional phrases are formed using a preposition and its object (a noun or
a pronoun). Prepositional phrases describe the relationship between the object
of the preposition and another element of a sentence. In general, prepositional
phrases describe relationships of place, time, and ownership.
The dog is hiding under the car.
They only rented that apartment for a month.
The back door of my house is painted blue.
Following is a list of commonly used prepositions.
about before despite of to
above behind down off toward
across below during on under
after beneath for out until
against beside from over up
along besides in since with
among between into through within
around beyond like throughout without
at by near till
Compound prepositions
A compound preposition functions as a single preposition, but is composed of
more than one word. Just like other prepositions, a compound preposition is fol-
lowed by a noun or pronoun object.
Following is a list of common compound prepositions.
ahead of in addition to in regard to
as far as in back of in spite of
because of in case of instead of
by means of in lieu of next to
contrary to in light of out of
They solved the problem by means of a special algorithm.
In case of fire, do not use the elevators.
In spite of his hard work, the promotion went to Jane Anderson.
He ran out of the haunted house.
Whether simple or compound, prepositions function the same in sentences.
110
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 110 2/25/08 11:01:55 AM

The preposition between expresses a choice involving two people or things, while the
preposition among expresses a choice involving more than two people or things.
She had to choose between going out or watching a movie at home.
There is an enormous difference between love and hate.
Just between you and me, I’d really like to go out with Juan’s sister.
The mood among the guests was quite festive.
I have always counted you among my friends.
Among the men in his squadron was a lad of only 19.
EXERCISE
19·1
In each sentence, underline the preposition(s), including compound prepositions,
and their noun objects.
1. He would prefer a hybrid car instead of the truck.

2. If they are still swimming in the pool, then they will be late for dinner.
3. The clouds floated high above the hills.
4. Tell me about the book you read.
5. George ran into the room and quickly took a seat next to Helen.
6. Is she the one you spoke of?
7. I recently got a letter from him while he was away in Iraq.
8. Contrary to public opinion, the election is not a foregone conclusion.
9. Sitting among the students was a professor from the philosophy department.
10. Are you satisfied with this table? I can get you another by the window.
EXERCISE
19·2
Complete each sentence with an appropriate object for each preposition.
EXAMPLE They had an argument with their new neighbor .
1. She spent a lot of time alone in .

2. They had to borrow some furniture from .
3. I must choose between .
4. We cannot leave before , but we’ll arrive there around
.
5. Does she know the way to ?
unit 19 Prepositions 111
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 111 2/25/08 11:01:56 AM

6. In spite of , they set out on the mountain hike.
7. In light of , I feel you should retake the course.
8. Among , he saw many old friends.
9. I’ve always been interested in .
10. Because of , the game had to be canceled.
Noun and pronoun objects

The object of a prepositional phrase can be either a noun or a pronoun. In most cases, when a
noun is replaced by a pronoun, the pronoun must be of the same number and gender as the
noun.
Ms. Harper spoke of her son quite often.
Ms. Harper spoke of him quite often.
He sat on the old mare and looked out over the valley.
He sat on her and looked out over the valley.
In spite of the impending storm, they set off for the park.
In spite of it, they set off for the park.
She never received the gift from Tom and me.
She never received the gift from us.
He danced with the same two girls all evening.
He danced with them all evening.
However, if a prepositional phrase introduced by in indicates a location, a pronoun object
sometimes cannot replace a noun object. Instead, it is more common to use an adverb, such as
here or there. This is particularly true of cities and large regions.
She loved living in Washington, D.C.
She loved living there.
We haven’t been in this town for very long.
We haven’t been here for very long.
Compare the examples above with those below.
The woman sat comfortably in a comfy chair.
The woman sat comfortably in it.
Richard found 50 dollars in the little box.
Richard found 50 dollars in it.
Something similar occurs with the preposition of when it shows possession and, on occa-
sion, with the preposition by. Although pronoun objects are quite acceptable following of and by,
there is a tendency to use a possessive pronoun in place of the prepositional phrase.
The color of the blouse is bright red.
Its color is bright red.
The roar of the huge lion gave me chills.
Its roar gave me chills.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 112 2/25/08 11:01:56 AM

The quality of his poems and short stories was highly regarded.
Their quality was highly regarded.
The lecture by Professor Helms had an impact on us all.
His lecture had an impact on us all.
The raid on the house by the police was carried out in secret.
Their raid on the house was carried out in secret.
Although each of these sentences could have contained a prepositional phrase with a pro-
noun object, the tendency is to use a possessive pronoun instead of a prepositional phrase.
POSSIBLE The raid on the house by them was unwarranted.
MORE LIKELY Their raid on the house was unwarranted.
EXERCISE
19·3
Rewrite each sentence, changing the prepositional phrase to one with a pronoun
object or to an appropriate adverb.
EXAMPLE No students were allowed in the professors’ lounge.

No students were allowed there.
1. We spent a lot of time in Brooklyn.
2. They have been in Mexico for over three years.
3. In the drawer, I found my sister’s diary.
4. City Hall has been located in this part of town for years.
5. What are you hiding in those little sacks?
Now, rewrite each sentence, changing the prepositional phrase to the appropriate possessive pronoun.
EXAMPLE I met the brother of the governor of the state.

I met his brother.
6. Do you really like the smell of cabbage soup?
7. The gowns of all three bridesmaids looked like flour sacks.
unit 19 Prepositions 113
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 113 2/25/08 11:01:56 AM

8. A symphony by an old Viennese composer was recently found.
9. They said the poems of Emily Dickinson are their favorites.
10. The political goals of America are slowly changing.
More than one prepositional phrase

Sentences are not limited to one prepositional phrase. Indeed, a series of prepositional phrases
can occur in one sentence.
Look in the attic in a little box on the floor behind that old mattress.
Each prepositional phrase in this example gives further information about where to look.
Where should I look? in the attic
Where in the attic? behind that old mattress
Where behind the mattress? on the floor
Where on the floor? in a little box
Naturally, you cannot connect random prepositional phrases to form a sentence. They must
make sense together and provide further information. Consider what might logically follow the
prepositional phrases in these examples.
She spent the night in an old house . . .
She spent the night in an old house located on a cliff near the Black River.
The men worked on the roof . . .
The men worked on the roof next to a chimney crumbling from years of neglect.
EXERCISE
19·4
Complete each sentence with at least one additional prepositional phrase.
1. They hid behind a bush .

2. Marie was locked in a room .
3. Francis moved to a village .
4. That city is located near the border .
5. I found the money under a box .
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 114 2/25/08 11:01:56 AM

Adjectives and adverbs ·20 ·
Adjectives
Adjectives describe or modify a noun or pronoun. They provide more informa-
tion about a noun or pronoun, and they can provide additional meaning for a
noun phrase.
Joseph is a famous guitar player.
The elderly couple slept at last.
The list of English adjectives is, of course, quite long. Here are some fre-
quently used examples.
appropriate generous lonely Spanish
beautiful good modern spicy
bitter intelligent poor tall
brown lazy rich tasty
forgetful local scary vintage
An English adjective has only one form, whether the noun or pronoun it
modifies is masculine, feminine, or neuter, or singular or plural. This is true for
predicate adjectives, as well as for adjectives that stand before a noun.
The new professor is quite intelligent.
Intelligent people don’t brag about their talents.
His youngest son is terribly lazy.
A lazy person probably won’t go far in life.
Even the baby giraffe is tall.
That tall girl is the star of her basketball team.
Adverbs
A primary function of adverbs is to modify verbs. Many adverbs are formed by
adding the suffix -ly to adjectives: quick ~ quickly, happy ~ happily, careful ~
carefully, bitter ~ bitterly.
She swims quickly.
He opened the window carefully.
Adverbs can also modify adjectives, thereby augmenting their meaning.
They are extremely sad.
The crowd soon became rather unruly.
115
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 115 2/25/08 11:01:57 AM

Several adverbs express time, for example, tomorrow, today, never, soon, yesterday, yet.
My parents are supposed to arrive tomorrow.
Will you be off the phone soon?
Has Jimmy taken his shower yet?
Some adverbs can be placed in the middle of a sentence, and they generally have a set posi-
tion there. Mid-sentence adverbs stand in front of verbs in the simple present and simple past
tenses. They follow forms of be in simple present and simple past tenses, and they stand between
an auxiliary verb and a main verb.
BEFORE SIMPLE PRESENT AND PAST TENSES
We seldom have dessert after dinner.

My brother often spent his free time playing his guitar.
I rarely talk on the phone for more than a few minutes.
Tom frequently asks an embarrassing question.
FOLLOWING SIMPLE PRESENT AND PAST TENSES OF be
Anna is always there on time.
Bill was sometimes late for an appointment.
Her husband is never around when she needs him.
The children are apparently in very good health.
BETWEEN AN AUXILIARY VERB AND MAIN VERB
John can never face his parents again.

Anna has always gotten there on time.
They have often traveled abroad.
Do you regularly shop in this store?
EXERCISE
20·1
Rewrite each sentence, placing never in the appropriate position. Then, rewrite
the sentence with rarely.
EXAMPLE He spoke with his aunt.

He never spoke with his aunt.
He rarely spoke with his aunt.
1. We had arranged a surprise party for them.
2. The soprano from France sang at the Met.
3. Grandfather was in a good mood.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 116 2/25/08 11:01:57 AM

4. My brother could fix his own car.
5. They will go to Alaska in the winter.
The word well can be used as an adverb or as an adjective. As an adverb, well means “in
a good manner” or “capably” and describes how someone does something. As an adjec-
tive, well means “healthy.”
EXERCISE
20·2
Underline the adjective(s) in each sentence.
1. This book is hard to read.

2. This is the best article I have ever read.
3. She was beautiful and happy at her wedding.
4. If we are fast, we will find good seats for the movie.
5. The humid breezes blew across the plain.
6. They were beaming and radiant at their anniversary.
Now, underline the adverb in each sentence.
7. We hurriedly ran out of the burning building.

8. I rarely take any breaks in the morning.
9. Loudly, the teenagers moved through the school corridors.
10. She finally went to the grocery store after running out of toilet paper.
11. He often read the Bible in the morning.
12. The library receives a copy of the newspaper biweekly.
13. Our manager spoke to us seriously about behavioral issues.
14. The children ended by playing indoors.
15. Catherine regularly brings coffee to her co-workers.
16. I was still stuck in traffic.
17. Perhaps we will fly to Atlanta next month.
unit 20 Adjectives and adverbs 117
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 117 2/25/08 11:01:57 AM

EXERCISE
20·3
Underline the word that correctly completes each sentence.
1. Joseph is a meticulous 兩 meticulously writer. He writes meticulous 兩 meticulously.

2. Catherine asked me an easy 兩 easily question. I was unable to answer her question,
but my friend Anjali answered it easy 兩 easily.
3. Pedro speaks loud 兩 loudly. He has a loud 兩 loudly voice.
4. Because the movie had already started, I entered the movie theater quiet 兩 quietly.
5. Sophie secretive 兩 secretly liked the boy.
6. Ali speaks Arabic very good 兩 well. He has very good 兩 well pronunciation.
Some adverbs can modify not only verbs and adjectives, but other adverbs as well. The func-
tion of this small group of adverbs is to impart a quality or degree to the meaning of the adverb.
A short list of these adverbs follows.
a bit
a little
exceptionally
extremely
quite
rather
somewhat
too
very
Consider the difference in meaning in the following pairs of sentences.
They were working fast.
They were working exceptionally fast.
The poor man wept bitterly.
The poor man wept quite bitterly.
She spoke rapidly.
She spoke too rapidly.
They approached the animal cautiously.
They approached the animal very cautiously.
EXERCISE
20·4
In each sentence, underline every adjective and adverb, marking each one adj (adjective)
or adv (adverb).
1. Sue opened the clean car door quite rapidly.

2. Moroccan jewelers carved beautiful pendants from ebony.
3. The old woman cooks the soup very carefully.
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 118 2/25/08 11:01:57 AM

4. A busy person usually has rather short conversations on the phone.
5. The children had a very good time at the amusement park yesterday.
EXERCISE
20·5
Rewrite each sentence, using the adverb in parentheses correctly in the sentence.
1. Catherine has finished writing the essay due tomorrow. (already)
2. Helen is at Jason’s house. (seldom)
3. Does he go to her house? (always)
4. He goes hiking to get away from it all and relax. (often)
5. She should tell him the truth. (always)
6. Eric has seen the ocean. (never)
7. Steven produces his electronic music on his laptop. (often)
8. Anna is at the club on Tuesday nights. (often)
9. Vince goes to the movies, because he prefers staying home. (rarely)
10. I don’t ask for a girl’s number if I don’t know her. (generally)
11. I have eaten an Asian pear. (never)
unit 20 Adjectives and adverbs 119
04 (90-119) ch 16-20.indd 119 2/25/08 11:01:58 AM

Filler subjects and
·21· impersonal subjects
Filler subjects
The word there can be used as a filler subject. It is commonly combined with
forms of be together with the actual subject of the sentence. Although the word
there is in the subject position of the sentence, it is actually the noun that follows
the verb that is the subject and that determines whether the form of be is singular
or plural.
There is a dog sitting on my porch.
There are 600 beds in this dormitory.
There were four people injured in the attack.
There will be a book waiting for you at the counter.
The word there is added to sentences like this to emphasize the existence of the
subject of the sentence. It is possible to compose versions of such sentences with-
out there.
A dog is sitting on my porch.
Six hundred beds are in this dormitory.
Four people were injured in the attack.
A book will be waiting for you at the counter.
Note that the noun subject uses an indefinite article when singular (a/an)
and no article when plural or a collective.
There is a dog sitting . . . not There is the dog sitting . . .
There were four people . . . not There were the four people . . .
There was frosting . . . not There was the frosting . . .
This expression can also be used with a variety of auxiliaries. In such cases, the
verb be occurs as an infinitive or auxiliary.
There seems to be a problem here.
There should be more time spent solving this problem.
There has been an accident on Route 10.
There have been several robberies on this street.
Could there be another reason for this problem?
There will not be enough time for that.
This structure is also used when be is the auxiliary in a passive structure.
There were two men arrested for the robbery.
There was no one blamed for the accounting errors.
120
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 120 2/25/08 11:02:58 AM

There can be used with a few other verbs, but sentences with such constructions often sound
stilted or old-fashioned.
There exists a state of war between our two nations.
Soon there developed the question whether the craft would actually fly.
EXERCISE
21·1
Rewrite each sentence, using there as the filler subject.
1. A cat was sleeping under the coffee table.
2. Several girls were learning to dance ballet.
3. A class photo will be taken at ten sharp.
4. A lot of damage had been caused by the storm.
5. Promises are to be kept.
Now, complete each sentence with an appropriate phrase.
6. There was .
7. Has there been ?
8. There will be .
9. There have been .
10. There are .
Impersonal subjects
Besides being the personal pronoun that replaces a neuter singular noun, it is also used as the
subject of the verb be, and occasionally of become. In such combinations, it forms an impersonal
subject. The meaning of sentences with impersonal subjects gives the responsibility of the condi-
tion described in the sentence to it, a mysterious, unknown subject.
It will be sunny tomorrow.
It is very nice in Kingston, Jamaica.
It was too hot in that room.
It will become clear before too long.
unit 21 Filler subjects and impersonal subjects 121
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 121 2/25/08 11:02:59 AM

When it is used as the personal pronoun replacement of a noun, its meaning is quite differ-
ent. The impersonal subject, however, doesn’t replace a noun. Compare the two uses of it.
PRONOUN REPLACEMENT
The house burned down. It burned down.

This essay by Einstein is hard to understand. It is hard to understand.
The struggle for peace never ends. It never ends.
IMPERSONAL SUBJECT
It was too late to go.

It became quite chilly.
Was it as humid last summer as it is this summer?
A subject repeated in consecutive sentences sounds awkward. This is true whether the
subject is a noun, noun phrase, or pronoun.
The girls didn’t dance. The girls didn’t sing.
Speaking rudely to a professor is a mistake. Speaking rudely to a professor can get
you in trouble.
It rained. It thundered. It poured for hours.
Conjunctions are used to combine such sentences and avoid repeated subjects.
The girls didn’t dance or sing.
Speaking rudely to a professor is a mistake and can get you in trouble.
It rained, thundered, and poured for hours.
EXERCISE
21·2
Complete each sentence with one of the following: an appropriate personal pronoun,
there, or it.
EXAMPLE My mom is a good leader. She is someone I look up to.
1. These youth summer camps really had an impact on my teenage years.

helped to make me who I am today.
2. Volunteers work very hard, and humanitarian organizations appreciate them very much.
Usually, become very close to the people work with.
3. Yesterday, rained for over five hours.
4. In Switzerland, is essential to speak French to get a job that pays well.
5. At the county jail, are a lot of teacher volunteers who can help inmates
prepare for exams.
6. My teacher tries to help us understand. For example, in math class often
spends a long time on complicated equations.
7. I come from Spain. There take three-hour lunch breaks.
8. Stress is awful. Actually, is one of the most negative feelings someone
could have.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 122 2/25/08 11:02:59 AM

9. I see you have a new car. When did you buy ?
10. I believe was in 1929 when happened.
EXERCISE
21·3
Fill in the blanks with it or there.
My cabin is in the back of the boat. It is a small cabin, but it is very cozy.
In addition to a single bunk bed and a minuscule dresser, is a small
desk in the corner of the cabin. On the bed is a plaid bedspread.
When is raining, is prohibited to open the window.
When is sunny, I can look out the window and see the ocean for miles
and miles. isn’t much room for anything in the cabin, but I don’t mind it.
While the cabin is very little, to me seems perfect.
EXERCISE
21·4
Decide if the italicized word it in each sentence is a personal pronoun (PP) or
an impersonal pronoun (IP), then write PP or IP in the blank.
EXAMPLE When it started to rain, we ran for the shelter. IP
1. He bought an old camera in Seattle. He found it in an antique shop downtown.

2. We stayed in a motel that night. When we got up the next day, it had begun to snow.
3. This article on chemistry was good. It was rather easy reading.

4. The streets are so confusing. It was rather easy to get lost.
5. It sleeted all night long. It wasn’t until morning that we saw how slick the streets
had become.
unit 21 Filler subjects and impersonal subjects 123
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 123 2/25/08 11:02:59 AM

·22· Clauses
A group of words that has a subject and a verb is called a clause. A clause may
or may not be a complete sentence. There are two kinds of clauses: independent
clauses and dependent clauses.
Independent clauses
An independent clause, or main clause, is a complete sentence. It contains the
main subject and verb of the sentence.
Alex goes to work.
The children are doing their homework.
It turned quite cold.
In addition to the subject and verb of a clause, other elements may be added
to the beginning, middle, or end of the clause to provide more information. These
elements can be adverbs, prepositional phrases, or even other clauses.
ADVERB Alex rarely goes to work.
PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE In the summer, Alex goes to work on his bike.
RELATIVE CLAUSE Alex, who is my husband’s best friend, goes to work
with me.
Dependent clauses
A dependent clause cannot stand on its own and make complete sense. It must be
connected to an independent clause. Consider the following examples, which
sound strange when they stand alone; they are dependent on another clause to
complete their meaning.
Although he likes it a lot.
When we visited Portugal.
Since he arrived here last June.
While the baby was still asleep.
These clauses have a subject and a verb, but they do not express a complete idea.
A dependent clause, by itself, is called a sentence fragment.
You can often recognize a dependent clause by the presence of a subor-

dinating conjunction. “Because he is on time” is a dependent clause,
whereas “He is on time” is an independent clause.
124
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 124 2/25/08 11:03:00 AM

The following sentences combine the dependent clauses in the examples above with inde-
pendent clauses to make complete sentences.
Although he likes it a lot, he won’t spend that much for the car.
When we visited Portugal, we came upon a beautiful mountain village.
Since he arrived here last June, he has refused to go out and find a job.
John and Mary cleaned up the family room while the baby was still asleep.
Following is a list of the most common conjunctions that could begin a dependent clause.
after because since when
although before so whenever
as even though though whether
as long as if unless while
as soon as in order that until
The relative pronouns who, which, and that also introduce a dependent clause.
EXERCISE
22·1
Underline the independent clause in each sentence.
1. If Mary gets here early, she will be able to eat some dessert.
2. Before he went to his class, Marco picked up something from the office.
3. William read the cover story of The Economist while he waited for lunchtime.
4. Barbara laughed when she heard the joke.
5. Paul watched as the woman slapped the teenager who had insulted her.
6. Even though alcohol is bad for your liver, many people enjoy drinking a lot of it.
Relative clauses
A relative clause is a dependent clause that modifies an antecedent noun or pronoun in an inde-
pendent clause. It identifies, describes, or otherwise provides information about the antecedent.
The subject pronouns for a relative clause are who, which, and that. In the following exam-
ples, note how two independent sentences are connected by a relative pronoun to make one single
complete sentence.
I thanked my dad. My dad brought me my house keys.
I thanked my dad, who brought me my house keys.
They live in Seattle. Seattle is on the Pacific Ocean.
They live in Seattle, which is on the Pacific Ocean.
She has the information. The information will clear my name.
She has the information that will clear my name.
If the same noun or pronoun occurs in two sentences as illustrated above, the second clause can
be changed to a relative clause by combining the two clauses with a relative pronoun. The re-
peated noun or pronoun in the second clause is changed to a relative pronoun.
unit 22 Clauses 125
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 125 2/25/08 11:03:00 AM

Note that the subject or object of two such clauses can be considered identical even if one is
the pronoun replacement of the other.
The laptop is mine. It is on the table.
The laptop that is on the table is mine.
I spoke with her mother. She said that Laura was out of town.
I spoke with her mother, who said that Laura was out of town.
Who is used for people, which is used for things, and that is used for both people and things.
But there is another difference to be considered between who, which, and that. Who and which
introduce relative clauses that are parenthetical in nature—they provide nonessential informa-
tion about the antecedent.
The governor, who is visiting Canada right now, was elected in a landslide.
This orchard, which was planted by my grandfather, produces 1,000 bushels of apples
each year.
The relative pronoun that introduces a clause that provides essential information about its
antecedent.
The governor that was recently elected received a standing ovation.
The orchard that was destroyed by insects was planted by my grandfather.
Commas separate a clause introduced by who or which, but not a clause introduced by
that.
If the relative pronoun is an object in the relative clause, who is changed to whom in formal
speech and writing; whom is not often used in casual speech. When the relative pronoun that is
the object of its clause, it can be omitted.
The men that they rewarded for their bravery are out of work.
The men they rewarded for their bravery are out of work.
The watch that he found on the sidewalk is priceless.
The watch he found on the sidewalk is priceless.
Prepositions, which require the object form of who and which, can stand in more than one
position in a relative clause: at the beginning or the end.
The men about whom she plans to write an article are out of work.
The men that she plans to write an article about are out of work.
The article from which we got the information is about global warming.
The article that we got the information from is about global warming.
If the relative pronoun is that, the position of the preposition is always at the end of the
clause and that can be omitted.
The books that you asked for are on your desk.
The books you asked for are on your desk.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 126 2/25/08 11:03:00 AM

EXERCISE
22·2
Combine each pair of sentences into one, using the second sentence as a relative clause.
1. The student is from Korea. She sits next to me.
2. The boy is excited. He won first prize.
3. I smelled the cake. It was cooling on the window ledge.
4. We are studying English. It involves learning many rules.
5. We are studying sentences. They contain different clauses.
6. I am using a relative clause. It includes a possessive pronoun.
7. Physics problems require long calculations. They are often very complex.
8. The bus driver was friendly. He spoke to me a lot.
9. I liked that girl. I met her at the zoo last week.
10. The movie was awful. I saw it.
11. I liked the poem. He wrote it.
12. His grandparents were very nice. We visited them last month.
unit 22 Clauses 127
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 127 2/25/08 11:03:01 AM

EXERCISE
22·3
Combine each pair of sentences into one, using the second sentence of each exercise
as a relative clause in two different ways.
EXAMPLE The child was loud. I heard him late last night.
The child, whom I heard late last night, was loud.
The child I heard late last night was loud.
1. I must thank your brother. I received flowers from him.
2. The woman was very kind. I spoke with her this morning.
3. The conference was interesting. I registered for it.
4. The painting was colorful and detailed. I was looking at it for a long time.
5. The man is sleeping over there. I was telling you about him.
Indefinite relative pronouns

Compound forms of the relative pronoun—whoever, whomever, whatever, and whichever—are
called indefinite relative pronouns, because they do not refer to a specific person or thing.
Whoever finishes first wins a prize. (one of the contestants)
The manager selects whomever she wants for the job. (one of the employees)
The man just blurted out whatever came to mind. (one of his thoughts)
Pick whichever of the two books interests you. (one of the books)
Who and what can also be used as an indefinite relative pronouns. They replace the old-fash-
ioned and awkward phrases him who and that which.
I don’t know him who arrived. ⬃ I don’t know who arrived.
I’ll tell you that which is important. ⬃ I’ll tell you what is important.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 128 2/25/08 11:03:01 AM

Indefinite who and what can also be used as objects in a relative clause.
Mr. Cole asked about whom the letter was written.
They announced who the new chancellor will be.
She didn’t understand what you were talking about.
Do you have any idea what the woman wanted?
Possessive relative pronouns

Whose is used to indicate possession. Like other possessive pronouns (my, your, his, her, its, our,
their), it is used to modify a noun. The possessive pronoun and the noun are placed at the begin-
ning of the relative clause.
I know this lady. Her purse was stolen.
I know this lady whose purse was stolen.
The man paints well. I saw his exposition.
The man, whose exposition I saw, paints well.
Whose may also replace a possessive noun.
They located the woman. The woman’s mother had become ill.
They located the woman whose mother had become ill.
Can you help the tourists? The tourists’ visas have expired.
Can you help the tourists whose visas have expired?
EXERCISE
22·4
EXAMPLE My neighbor is very nice. I am walking her dog.

My neighbor, whose dog I am walking, is very nice.
1. Mr. Castro teaches a class for foreign students. His native language is Spanish.
2. The yoga instructor is excellent. I am taking his class.
3. I met the man. His son is my office manager.
4. The woman called 911. The woman’s apartment was on fire.
5. I laughed at the man. I pushed him in the pool.
6. I come from France. Its history goes back hundreds of years.
unit 22 Clauses 129
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 129 2/25/08 11:03:01 AM

7. The people were crazy. We visited their house.
8. I sleep in a hotel. Its residents are very noisy.
9. I have to call the girl. I accidentally picked up her cell phone after our date.
10. The boy put lotion all over his face. His cheeks got sunburned while he was lying
at the swimming pool.
EXERCISE
22·5
Underline the relative clause in each sentence.
EXAMPLE The car that he is driving is brand new.
1. The fireman who put out the fire was very fast.
2. The friends I was waiting for were late.
3. The shoes that she is wearing are handmade.
4. The project Peter is working on must be finished by March.
5. The person whose advice I take most seriously is my mom.
6. Did I tell you about the accident I had last week?
7. The man I was talking to pushed me out of the way.
8. Did you hear about the explosion that destroyed the embassy?
EXERCISE
22·6
Combine each pair of sentences into one, using the second sentence as a relative clause
in two different ways, where possible. Some pairs of sentences permit only one wording
of the relative clause.
EXAMPLE The child was loud. I heard him late last night.
The child, whom I heard late last night, was loud.
The child I heard late last night was loud.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 130 2/25/08 11:03:01 AM

1. The younger men are from Peru. We met them in the hotel lobby this morning.
2. I explained my absence to the manager. I had missed his presentation.
3. Yesterday, I ran into Paul. I hadn’t seen him in months.
4. The driver missed the red light. He was not paying attention.
5. He spoke of the postmodern movement. I know nothing about it.
6. The historian is well known for his research. We met him in Paris.
7. I am reading a novel. It was written by Alexander Dumas.
8. The teacher gave good explanations. I questioned him.
9. The professor gives easy exams. I passed his class.
10. I returned the car. I had borrowed it from my father.
11. The hunter caught the lion. It had killed someone from the village.
12. The children are very quiet. I am taking care of them.
unit 22 Clauses 131
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 131 2/25/08 11:03:01 AM

Where
In a relative clause, where refers to a place in the independent clause and replaces a prepositional
phrase indicating location. The preposition from the phrase replaced by where is not used.
The house is new. He lives in the house.
The house where he lives is new.
The house, in which he lives, is new.
The house, which he lives in, is new.
The house that he lives in is new.
The house he lives in is new.
The barn caught fire. They were playing inside the barn.
The barn, where they were playing, caught fire.
The barn, inside which they were playing, caught fire.
The barn, which they were playing inside, caught fire.
The barn that they were playing inside caught fire.
The barn they were playing inside caught fire.
Where may also replace there in such clauses.
The house is new. He lives there.
The house where he lives is new.
EXERCISE
22·7
1. That is the cafeteria. I will eat lunch in the cafeteria.
2. The medieval village was beautiful. We spent our summer there.
3. The neighborhood is dangerous. I grew up in the neighborhood.
4. That is the account. I kept all my savings in the account.
5. Carl is from Jamaica. I used to live there.
When
In a relative clause, when refers to a time expression in the independent clause and replaces an
adverbial expression of time. The preposition accompanying a noun (on that day, in that year, at
that time, in that century, and so on) is used before which. Otherwise, the preposition is omitted.
When may also replace then in such clauses.
I’ll never forget that day. I cried a lot that day. (I cried a lot then.)
I’ll never forget that day, when I cried a lot.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 132 2/25/08 11:03:02 AM

I’ll never forget that day, on which I cried a lot.
I’ll never forget that day that I cried a lot.
I’ll never forget that day I cried a lot.
Time expressions use various prepositions, but when replaces the entire prepositional phrase,
including the preposition.
She came in May. The weather is better then.
She came in May, when the weather is better.
It happened on Monday. He was still at home then.
It happened on Monday, when he was still at home.
I’ll be there next week. Exams will be finished next week.
I’ll be there next week, when exams will be finished.
Everyone left the party. The band stopped playing after the party.
Everyone left the party when the band stopped playing.
EXERCISE
22·8
with when.
1. 1:10 p.m. is the time. My train arrives at the station then.
2. June is the month. I will come in June.
3. 1959 is the year. The Cuban socialist revolution took place then.
4. Wednesday is the day. My plane arrives on Wednesday.
EXERCISE
22·9
Rewrite each sentence, using where in a relative clause. Begin your response with
That ⫹ a form of be.
EXAMPLE She often shops in that store.

That is the store where she often shops.
1. I was parked on that sidewalk.
2. I was born in that city.
unit 22 Clauses 133
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 133 2/25/08 11:03:02 AM

3. You do your grocery shopping at that store.
4. You keep your money at that bank.
5. He works in that building.
6. She lives on that street.
7. We ate lunch at that Mexican restaurant.
8. We have class in that amphitheater.
9. We spent our vacation in that hotel.
10. You went fishing in that river.
11. I lived in that town until I was ten years old.
12. Your father went to graduate school at that university.
EXERCISE
22·10
Answer each question according to the example. Do not use a relative pronoun.
EXAMPLE You played the record. Was it good? (no)

No, the record I played was not good.
1. You watched a movie. Was it scary? (yes)
2. You drank some iced coffee. Did it taste good? (no)
3. You bought a scarf. Does it keep your neck warm? (yes)
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 134 2/25/08 11:03:02 AM

4. You had Chinese noodles for dinner. Were they too spicy? (no)
5. You talked to a man. Did he answer your questions? (yes)
6. You saw a little girl. Was she wearing a pink sweater? (no)
7. You went to the football game. Was it exciting? (yes)
8. You stayed at a bed-and-breakfast. Was it in the countryside? (no)
9. You are finishing an exercise. Is it difficult? (no)
10. You got a letter in the mail. Was it from your aunt? (no)
EXERCISE
22·11
Combine each pair of sentences into one, using a relative clause with whose.
1. Neil Young is a musician. You are listening to his album.
2. Aline Helg is a professor. I am writing a thesis for her class.
3. Mr. Mohammed is a student. I found his notes.
4. Paul is an intern. I borrowed his pen.
5. The child began to scream. You lost his ball.
6. Your neighbors are very funny. You stayed at your neighbor’s house.
7. An executive has been in a meeting for five hours. The executive’s office is locked.
unit 22 Clauses 135
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 135 2/25/08 11:03:02 AM

8. A woman’s necklace was stolen. The woman called a private detective.
9. Basquiat is an artist. You like his paintings the best.
10. Everyone tried to help the mother. Her car had broken down.
Relative clauses that modify pronouns

Relative clauses can modify indefinite pronouns; the relative pronoun is usually omitted when it
is the object of the clause.
Anybody who wants to come is welcome. (subject)
There is someone I want to talk to. (object)
Everything he paints is ugly. (object)
Other indefinite pronouns that follow this pattern are anything, everyone, no one, and nothing.
Relative clauses can also modify the one(s) and those. The relative pronoun is used when it is
the subject of the clause.
Financial aid is available for those who really need it. (subject)
Jeffrey was the only one I knew at the meeting. (object)
EXERCISE
22·12
Complete each sentence with a relative clause.
EXAMPLE Scream at Tammy. She is the only one who is to blame for the accident .
1. Peter makes a good first impression. He charms everyone .

2. I know someone .
3. Ask Margaret. She’s the only one .
4. I’m powerless to help her. There’s nothing .
5. We can’t trust anyone. There’s no one .
6. You can believe him. Everything .
7. All of the guests are seated. The host is the only one .
8. The test we took today was more difficult than the one .
9. The show has already begun. Those had to wait until
the end of the first scene to be seated.
10. The group was divided in half. Those were told to go left.
Those were asked to take the right tunnel.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 136 2/25/08 11:03:02 AM

Expressing quantity in relative clauses
Quantity can be expressed in a relative clause with the preposition of following an expression of
quantity, such as most, many, or some. The relative pronoun (whom, which, or whose) follows of.
In my office, there are 12 people. Most of them are graduate students.
In my office, there are 12 people, most of whom are graduate students.
She gave us several tips. Only a few of them were useful.
She gave us several tips, only a few of which were useful.
The team captains discussed John. One of his problems was lack of discipline.
The team captains discussed John, one of whose problems was lack of discipline.
Following are some commonly used expressions that can introduce quantity in a relative
clause.
all of (a) few of most of a number of
both of (a) little of neither of some of
each of many of none of two of
EXERCISE
22·13
EXAMPLE He found several books. One of the books was in French.

He found several books, one of which was in French.
1. Last night, the Metropolitan Movie Theater showed three of Stanley Kubrick’s movies.
One of them was Dr. Strangelove.
2. The village has three schools. Two of them are high schools.
3. I tried on three hats. I liked one of them.
4. The capital has about five million people. The majority of them are poor.
5. The army currently employs thousands of young men. All of them have obtained their GED.
6. After the riots in Paris, over 400 people were arrested. Many of them were peaceful
protesters.
unit 22 Clauses 137
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 137 2/25/08 11:03:03 AM

7. They spread rumors about Catherine. One of her faults was being beautiful beyond belief.
EXERCISE
22·14
Complete the relative clause in each sentence with words of your choice.
1. The Turners own four dogs, one of .

2. Sylvia introduced me to her best friends, one of .
3. I have three aunts, all of .
4. I am taking three flights, one of .
5. I have two sisters, neither of .
6. The company hired four new secretaries, one of .
7. Last year I read about 20 books, four of .
8. In my parents’ house, there are six guest rooms, several of
.
Noun 쎵 of which
A relative clause may begin with a noun followed by of which. This construction, which is primar-
ily used in formal written English, is a form of the possessive.
He has an antique Japanese table. The top of it is made from ebony.
He has an antique Japanese table, the top of which is made from ebony.
In less formal style, the sentence would be as follows.
He has an antique Japanese table, whose top is made from ebony.
EXERCISE
22·15
with the formal of which.
1. They bought an original Matisse painting. The value of the painting cannot possibly
be estimated.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 138 2/25/08 11:03:03 AM

2. I bought a newspaper. The name of the newspaper is Le Monde.
3. We visited a Victorian castle. The interior of the castle was made of wood.
4. The United Nations is going through many changes. The outcome of these changes
might alter human history.
5. My store’s income is dependent on souvenirs. The sale of the souvenirs depends on the
number of tourists.
Which as the relative pronoun for an entire clause

An entire clause can be referred to by the relative pronoun which. This occurs when the relative
pronoun refers not to one element in the main clause, but to the entire concept described in that
clause.
Robin was early. That surprised everyone.
Robin was early, which surprised everyone.
In this example, no one was surprised by Robin. No one was surprised by the early (time). But
everyone was surprised by the entire idea that Robin was early. The antecedent of which is, there-
fore, the entire main clause.
The escalator is out of order. This is rather inconveniencing.
The escalator is out of order, which is rather inconveniencing.
Both Tom and Laura won prizes. That made Dad very proud.
Both Tom and Laura won prizes, which made Dad very proud.
Marco falls asleep in class every day. This is unacceptable.
Marco falls asleep in class every day, which is unacceptable.
EXERCISE
22·16
Combine each pair of sentences into one, using the second sentence as a relative clause,
the antecedent of which is the entire main clause.
1. Clara was expelled from school. That took her family by surprise.
2. My husband never washes the dishes. This annoys me.
unit 22 Clauses 139
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 139 2/25/08 11:03:03 AM

3. Pedro isn’t home yet. That concerns me.
4. There was a fire in Key West. This means many villas burned.
5. I shut the car door on my finger. That was really silly of me.
EXERCISE
22·17
Write an appropriate sentence on the first line, then combine the pair of sentences
into one, using a relative clause.
EXAMPLE My pants came off when I jumped in the pool . That embarrassed me.
My pants came off when I jumped in the pool, which embarrassed me.
1. . That distracted me a lot.
2. . That shocked us all.
3. . That means she’ll be

home anytime.
4. . I enjoyed that very much.
5. . That was unexpected

good news.
6. . That bothered me.
7. . That annoyed me so
much that I could not fall asleep.
8. . That was so loud that

it gave me a headache.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 140 2/25/08 11:03:03 AM

Noun clauses
A noun clause can be used as a subject or an object. It is composed of a noun and other elements
that are used as a single entity—the subject or object of the sentence.
SUBJECT
What he brought was beautiful.

What he brought back was beautiful.
What he brought back in his suitcase was beautiful.
OBJECT
I saw what he photographed.

I saw what he photographed with an old camera.
I saw what he skillfully photographed with an old camera.
Following is a list of words that can introduce noun clauses.
how when who
if where whom
that whether whose
what which why
Noun clauses that begin with a question word

Noun clauses can be used as part of a response to a question.
QUESTION Where do they study?
RESPONSE I don’t know where they study.
QUESTION Who built this castle?
RESPONSE No one has any idea who built this castle.
When used as a noun clause, the original question becomes either the subject or the object
of the new sentence.
SUBJECT What she thought about Bill was best kept a secret.
OBJECT I have no idea what she thought about Bill.
Whereas do, does, and did are used to form questions with many verbs, they are never used
in a noun clause.
QUESTION What did she buy at the store?
RESPONSE I don’t know what she bought at the store.
QUESTION What time does Tom’s plane arrive?
RESPONSE Mom knows what time Tom’s plane arrives.
Note that the subject of a noun clause always precedes the verb, whether the question word
is the subject or not. The question word is always the first element of a noun clause.
Who is in the backyard? (subject ⫽ who)
I wonder who is in the backyard.
What is she doing? (subject ⫽ she)
What she is doing is terribly wrong.
Where are the boys now? (subject ⫽ boys)
No one knows where the boys are now.
On what day will they arrive? (subject ⫽ they)
I know on what day they will arrive.
unit 22 Clauses 141
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 141 2/25/08 11:03:04 AM

EXERCISE
22·18
Rewrite the question in parentheses, changing it to a noun clause in the new sentence.
EXAMPLE (What were they excited about?) What they were excited about was to be
kept a secret.
1. (What was she mad about?) . was important.

2. (How well read is she?) I don’t know .
3. (Where do you go shoe shopping?) Please tell me
.
4. (How old is that child?) I have no idea .
5. (Whose pencil is this?) Do you know ?
6. (Who are those men?) I don’t know .
7. (Who is coming to the meeting?) I can’t tell .
8. (Which flavor of ice cream does she want?) Let’s ask her
.
9. (How expensive is it?) I can’t recall .
10. (What did he send you?) I forgot .
11. (What did she say to you?) is a lie!
12. (Why did you leave the state?) is a mystery.
13. (What are we doing at work?) is top secret.
14. (What are we doing in English class today?)
is easy.
15. (Whom is she dating?) is none of your
business.
16. (Who is the president of Enron?) I don’t know
.
17. (How old does someone have to be in order to drink?) I need to look up
.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 142 2/25/08 11:03:04 AM

EXERCISE
22·19
Rewrite each sentence as a question based on the information in italics.
EXAMPLE That girl is from West Africa.

Where is that girl from?
1. George was late for registration, because he slept in.
2. It is two hours from San Antonio to the Mexican border.
3. Sarah sold a blue painting.
4. Pedro resides in Chicago.
5. That woman is Rita Davis.
6. That is Jamie’s computer.
7. Joseph saw Peter at the dinner.
8. Sophie likes this movie best, not that other one.
9. Vicente noticed Barbara at the bar.
10. The train is scheduled to arrive at noon.
EXERCISE
22·20
Change each question you created in Exercise 22-19 into a noun clause,
using the blanks provided.
EXAMPLE (Where is that girl from?) I want to know where that girl is from .
1. The administrative assistant wants to know .

2. He needs to know .
3. I don’t know .
unit 22 Clauses 143
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 143 2/25/08 11:03:04 AM

4. I want to know .
5. I want to know .
6. Jessica wants to know .
7. I ignored .
8. I don’t know .
9. I want to know .
10. Could you please tell me ?
Noun clauses that begin with whether or if

Whether or if is used to introduce a clause when a yes/no question is changed to a noun clause.
If often replaces whether in casual speech.
Will they come?
I don’t know whether they will come.
I don’t know if they will come.
Does she need assistance?
I wonder whether she needs assistance.
I wonder if she needs assistance.
The phrase or not is sometimes included in the noun clause.
I wonder whether or not they will come.
I wonder whether they will come or not.
I wonder if she will come or not.
EXERCISE
22·21
Answer each question, beginning your sentence with I wonder.
EXAMPLE What are they doing this summer?

I wonder what they are doing this summer.
1. Where is Adrian?
2. Who took the television remote?
3. Should you call her?
4. Does Marie need any help?
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 144 2/25/08 11:03:04 AM

5. Did you leave your keys on the counter?
6. Who is that man?
7. What are they doing?
8. Is she in trouble?
9. Should we offer to help him?
10. Do we have enough time to go on vacation?
11. Whose bike is this?
12. Why is the grass so green?
13. How long does a bonsai live?
14. Is there life on Mars?
15. How was the earth created?
Noun clauses that begin with that

That can introduce a noun clause. It has no meaning per se, which is why it is often omitted, par-
ticularly in spoken English.
She is a good cook.
We all think that she is a good cook.
We all think she is a good cook.
The sea is blue.
I know that the sea is blue.
I know the sea is blue.
However, that cannot be omitted if the noun clause is used as the subject of the sentence.
She doesn’t like silent movies.
That she doesn’t like silent movies comes as a surprise to me.
unit 22 Clauses 145
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 145 2/25/08 11:03:05 AM

The pronoun it often introduces a main clause that is followed by a noun clause introduced
by that.
It comes as a surprise to me that she doesn’t like silent movies.
It is well known that there is corruption at City Hall.
EXERCISE
22·22
Change each sentence into a noun clause, first using It is plus the expression
in parentheses, and then using that to introduce the noun clause.
EXAMPLE The ice is cold. (a fact)

It is a fact that the ice is cold.
That the ice is cold is a fact.
1. Some immigrants don’t receive equal pay for equal work. (unfair)
2. Patricia has not been able to make it to second grade. (too bad)
3. Alcohol abuse can ruin one’s life. (a well-known fact)
4. The sun is a star. (a fact)
5. Smoking can cause lung cancer. (true)
6. Marc has made no friends here. (strange)
7. English is the principal language of the international business community. (obvious)
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 146 2/25/08 11:03:05 AM

Question words and infinitives
Question words and whether may be followed by infinitives. The infinitive replaces the subject of
the clause plus should, can, or could.
Peter can’t decide whether he should go or stay at the office.
Peter can’t decide whether to go or (to) stay at the office.
I don’t know whether I should laugh or cry.
I don’t know whether to laugh or (to) cry.
Please tell her how she can get to the nearest post office.
Please tell her how to get to the nearest post office.
Alicia told me where I could buy a cheap scooter.
Alicia told me where to buy a cheap scooter.
EXERCISE
22·23
Complete each sentence with an appropriate infinitive or infinitive phrase.
1. I was confused, and I wasn’t sure what .

2. She’s got so many dresses. She can’t decide which
to the party.
3. I would like to live on the East Side, but I also like downtown. I can’t decide whether
.
4. I can’t wait to begin soccer practice. Do you know how
?
5. I have been looking around all day, and I don’t know what
for their anniversary.
6. Before you go to Marfa, go visit their Web site. It tells you where
and when .
7. My mom is hesitant. She doesn’t know whether or
.
EXERCISE
22·24
Rewrite each sentence, replacing the subject and auxiliary verb in the noun clause
with an infinitive.
EXAMPLE They told me whom I should look for.

They told me whom to look for .
1. Please let me know where I can meet up with you.
unit 22 Clauses 147
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 147 2/25/08 11:03:05 AM

2. The fireman told me how I could stop a fire from spreading.
3. She told me when I should get there.
4. Elizabeth liked two puppies, but she had trouble deciding which one she should take home.
5. Alex played in a rock band that was successful, but Nathalie didn’t know whether she should
buy their new album or not.
The subjunctive
After certain main verbs, a noun clause beginning with that requires its verb to be subjunctive.
The subjunctive form of a verb is its base form, for example, run, be, and show.
The law demands that we be fair.
I insisted that she stop by my house.
I suggested that he not go to the football game.
It is important that she be told where to sit.
Following is a list of common verbs and expressions that require a subjunctive verb in a
noun clause introduced by that.
advise (that) it is essential (that) recommend (that)
ask (that) it is important (that) request (that)
demand (that) it is necessary (that) suggest (that)
insist (that) it is vital (that)
it is crucial (that) propose (that)
EXERCISE
22·25
Complete each sentence with an appropriate verb phrase in the subjunctive.
EXAMPLE I suggest you tell him everything you know .
1. I must insist that the man .

2. The judge recommends that we .
3. The lawyer demanded that she .
4. They have requested that Mimi .
5. We only ask that your son .
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 148 2/25/08 11:03:05 AM

Punctuation ·23·
Punctuation is used to make text easier to read and to convey clear and specific
meaning. It is used to divide words into grammatical units, like clauses within
sentences. Punctuation marks consist of a set of standardized symbols: periods,
commas, semicolons, colons, question marks, exclamation points, apostrophes,
quotation marks, hyphens and dashes, and parentheses and brackets. The proper
use of these symbols is governed by grammatical and stylistic guidelines.
The period
A period is used to end a declarative sentence or imperative sentence. The period
stands inside quotation marks.
They are going to the mall.
Hand me the book next to you, please.
Finish your dinner so you can go to sleep.
She said, “I’m not leaving my purse on the table unattended.”
Periods are also often used with abbreviations and acronyms.
Massachusetts Ave. begins in Dorchester.
The U.S. and China are the countries most responsible for greenhouse gas
emissions.
If a sentence ends with an abbreviation or acronym, no additional period is
required.
They will bring the dishes, serving pieces, flatware, etc.
The train arrives at ten p.m.
Their son recently received his B.S.
EXERCISE
23·1
Add periods where needed.
1. The city council requested that Gov Madison allocate more funds to the
development of children’s playgrounds
2. Richard told his parents, “I enjoy having dinner before eight o’clock, because
it gives me enough time to finish my homework before going to sleep”
3. Meet them at Whole Foods for breakfast
149
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 149 2/25/08 11:03:05 AM

4. Nathan said to his professor, “I can’t be done with my paper by Monday”
5. I thanked Mrs Bronco for giving us a ride to school this morning
6. Sgt Pepper was called to the conference room for an important membership meeting
The comma
A comma is used to separate two independent clauses joined by any of the following coordinating
conjunctions: and, but, for, or, and nor.
The men remained in the kitchen, and the women went out to the garden.
We were supposed to go boating, but the storm changed our plans.
Should we stay home tonight, or should we go out to dinner?
A comma is used to separate a dependent clause from the main clause that follows.
Even though the concert was great, we had to leave early.
When I was through with the dishes, I sat down with a glass of wine.
If the dependent clause follows the main clause, the comma is often not used.
I sat down with a glass of wine when I was through with the dishes.
A comma is used to separate an introductory element from the main clause of a sentence.
Running as fast as he could, Chris finished second in the marathon.
Taken completely by surprise, the enemy was forced to surrender.
A comma is used after a wide range of introductory words, including yes, no, oh, and well, at
the beginning of a sentence.
No, I can’t tell you why she left so suddenly.
Well, they may stay in the guest room if they leave by tomorrow afternoon.
A comma is used to separate an apposite phrase from the rest of a sentence. An apposi-
tion is a word or phrase placed after another to provide additional information about it or to
explain it.
Erin likes that dress, which she bought at a Macy’s sale, because it fits so well.
We saw that blue car, the one that is parked right over there on the street, the last time
we ate here.
My game console, an Xbox, offers crystal clear graphics.
A comma is used to separate declarative elements from a clause that poses a question.
She is depending on those grades, isn’t she?
That movie was beautiful, don’t you think?
A comma is used to separate groups of numbers, the different elements of an address, and
the date from the year. A comma ordinarily is not used to separate the name of a month from the
year.
Their twentieth wedding anniversary was on March 10, 2000.
Barbara and I lived at 232 Lorraine Road, Austin, Texas for roughly ten years.
He left South Korea in May 1977.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 150 2/25/08 11:03:06 AM

A comma is used to separate interrupting elements from the rest of a sentence.
If Shawn writes more than 20 pages by the end of this weekend, and we doubt he will,
he will treat himself to a smoothie.
When John finishes his degree, which would be some kind of a miracle, he plans to start
his own business.
Karen won a prize in the lottery and, with any luck, will be able to pay off her debts.
A comma is used at the end of the greeting of a personal letter and at the end of the
closing.
Dear Mr. Mustar,
Sincerely yours,
A comma is used to separate numbers composed of four or more digits (except for years).
The company made more than $8,000,000 in the last fiscal year.
We need 1,500 cubic yards of concrete for the parking lot.
A comma is sometimes used when the meaning of a sentence needs to be preserved and to
avoid confusion.
She asked me why I hadn’t kissed her, and giggled. (to make clear that it is she who giggled)
A comma is used to separate direct quotations from the rest of a sentence.
Mr. Wilson told me, “There is no gain without some loss.”
The president always said, “To protect our freedom, I must be conservative.”
A comma is used to separate the person or persons being addressed from the rest of the
sentence.
Ladies and gentlemen of the jury, may I have your attention?
Jack, turn down the volume on the TV.
A comma is used to separate items in a series.
We bought apples, plums, and a bushel of tomatoes.
They hope to visit France, Germany, and the Netherlands.
EXERCISE
23·2
For each sentence, explain the use of the comma(s).
1. Although we got there on time, we missed the train.
2. She had lived at 6745 East Pinch Street, Austin, Texas since January 17, 1998.
3. I went to the concert, but I had forgotten the tickets.
4. The foundation gave $1,876,937 to the education council of Burundi.
unit 23 Punctuation 151
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 151 2/25/08 11:03:06 AM

5. Albert did his homework, as promised, and should not be failed.
6. Distinguished ladies and gentleman, it is with pride that I appear before you tonight.
7. She was fascinated by his gentle, polite, elegant ways.
EXERCISE
23·3
Add commas where needed.
1. Taylor asked “How are we supposed to cook this with no oven?”

2. She packed two blouses a black skirt and a new business suit.
3. According to the U.S. Census Bureau the world population reached 6500000000 on
February 25 2006.
4. Dear Mrs. Dimple
5. The Persian Gulf War officially ended on February 28 1991.
6. They were so excited by the soccer game which went into three overtimes that they hardly
noticed the afternoon go by.
7. Marie Catherine and Chris are all going to the theater together.
8. IBM not Apple will build a fast computer.
9. If you’ve never been to the craft show there will be selected sales and bargain bins.
10. She will be participating won’t she?
11. Yes I think there is enough time for you to pick it up and get back home before dinner.
12. If I could get a nickel for every time he lies I would be a billionaire.
13. He had intended to stay home but he decided instead to go running.
The semicolon
A semicolon is used to mark a break between independent clauses in the same sentence. It links
clauses that are closely related.
She has asked them to leave several times; they had a habit of overstaying their welcome.
For the second time, he rescued a drowning child; his bravery is well known.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 152 2/25/08 11:03:07 AM

A semicolon is also used before conjunctive adverbs and transitional phrases that join inde-
pendent clauses.
They had been walking around the neighborhood for hours, looking for the lost dog; at the
same time, they talked to neighbors they had never met before.
The salesman let the man take the car for a drive; soon after, he had the eager buyer signing
the purchase papers.
A semicolon is used to join independent clauses connected by a coordinating conjunction
(and, but, for, or, nor, so, or yet) when at least one of the clauses contains a comma.
It was time for the football team to take a break, drink some water, and stretch; but there were
so many different exercises, and they had such a limited space, that they would need to be
on break for too long to really stretch properly.
A semicolon is used to separate a series of elements from the rest of the sentence when
at least one of the elements is long and contains commas. These elements can be phrases or
clauses.
In his analytical thesis on the Ninth Symphony, the author decided to include information
about Beethoven’s father, Johann, who was his first music teacher; Christian Gottlob
Neefe, his most important teacher in Bonn; and Giulietta Guicciardi, his fiancée.
A semicolon is placed outside quotations marks.
Sheryl told them, “You might be scared when you watch this movie”; still, I don’t think it’s
scary enough to prevent you from watching it.
Semicolons are never used to join dependent to independent clauses.
EXERCISE
23·4
Add semicolons where needed.
1. The computers at my job have large monitors, loud speakers, CD burners, DVD players,
and all sorts of other useful hardware are equipped with the most recent software and
have the most sophisticated firewall.
2. Peter was amazed by the talent of the opposing team’s poetry skills at the same time,
he knew his team could win the poetry contest.
3. Greg was the first to run out of the burning house however, Elizabeth was the one who
made it to a pay phone to call the fire department.
4. Each of us had enough time to get in the hotel’s swimming pool nevertheless, we were
all there on business.
5. There are moments when one needs to think about a situation calmly and for a long time
likewise, there are moments when one needs to make decisions quickly and instinctively.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 153 2/25/08 11:03:07 AM

6. Gina said, “Let’s work as a group” Peter said, “We should work individually instead” and
Andrew said, “Let’s split the team, and while some can work as a group, others can work
individually.”
7. Karen has been painting the kitchen for three hours all the while, she has been cooking
and playing with the dogs.
The colon
A colon connects clauses that are closely linked in meaning or topic. Typically, the second clause
continues or develops the thought of the first clause, or it contains an illustration or explanation
of a topic in the first clause. If a complete sentence follows a colon, the first word of that sentence
should be capitalized.
Bill has 20 paintings on his wall: Ten of them he painted himself.
The dictator was overthrown: The cruelty of his methods and the corruption of his
government were finally exposed.
Everything in his life seemed to be coming apart and collapsing: his marriage, his career,
his confidence in himself.
The economic sustainability of Bangladesh depends on three factors: the production of tea
and rice, the export of garments, and foreign investment.
A colon is sometimes used to introduce dialogue or formal statements. In this case, the first
word after the colon is capitalized.
Julien could not help himself when the teacher asked him what was wrong: “There is no
reason for all of us to be punished because Fred won’t stop acting silly in class!”
If she wants my opinion, this is what I shall tell her: “You need to raise your own kids
when they’re that little and stop leaving them in day care.”
A colon is used after the greeting in formal or business letters.
Dear Mrs. Jackson:
Dear Governor:
A colon is used to separate hours and minutes in statements of time.
8:15 a.m.
11:37 p.m.
EXERCISE
23·5
Add colons where needed.
1. She told me what her favorite colors were blue, red, and light olive green.
2. Dear Madam President
3. It is 530 A.M.; why are you calling me so early?
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 154 2/25/08 11:03:07 AM

4. There are three main ingredients in a cake sugar, flour, and eggs.
5. It was time for the lawyer to make his closing statement “My client is an honest man,
a hardworking man, a good husband, and he should not be sitting in this court today.”
6. Nixon said “Looting and pillaging have nothing to do with civil rights. Starting riots to
protest unfair treatment by the state is not the best of solutions.”
7. John has five trophies on his bookshelf Four of them are from basketball tournaments.
8. The professor made an interesting statement during class “We have not yet addressed
the topic of social revolutions, which is a key component of our present argument.”
The question mark

A question mark is used at the end of a sentence to signal a question; it can be a direct question,
an interrogative series, or an expression of editorial doubt.
When are you coming?
Peter waved his hands while jumping up and down. What if they failed to see him?
What do you think of his paintings? sculptures? drawings?
Despite his participation in the 1934 riots (?), we do not know which organization
he was marching with.
The exclamation point

An exclamation point or mark is used to signal an interjection, which is often associated with
fear, surprise, shock, excitement, or disbelief. An exclamation point can also be used instead of a
question mark to indicate that the overall emotion of a question is surprise, not interrogation.
That’s amazing!
Great!
He stops short, shoots, and scores!
Did they really believe we were that stupid!
EXERCISE
23·6
Insert questions marks and exclamation points where needed.
1. Are you serious

2. Get out of here now
3. What do you think of the president’s decision to go to war his views on foreign policy his
thoughts on the economy
4. Quickly What are you waiting for
5. Are you in a hurry
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 155 2/25/08 11:03:07 AM

6. When were you going to tell me
7. Super
8. That’s so cool
9. Do you think the corporation will apologize for unjustly firing those employees taking
away their retirement not providing them with a severance package
10. Are you out of your mind
The apostrophe
An apostrophe is used in one of two ways: to form a contraction (a shortened version of two
words) or to express possession. Following are some common English contractions.
cannot can’t
do not don’t
it is it’s
what is what’s
who is who’s
In the same way that the apostrophe is used to replace letters that have been omitted, it can
also be used to indicate that numbers have been omitted.
1990 ’90
2008 ’08
The following examples illustrate the use of the apostrophe to express possession.
Damien’s car is really fast.
Rosie’s roses are so pretty.
The roller skates are Helen’s.
Have the employees’ paychecks come in yet?
When an apostrophe is used to indicate joint ownership, only the last word has the
apostrophe.
My grandmother and grandfather’s paintings are in the attic.
Bill and Peter’s car dealership is at the next intersection.
If joint ownership is not involved, each party has an apostrophe.
Tim and Barbara’s pets (All the pets belong to both Tim and Barbara.)
Tim’s and Barbara’s pets (Tim has his pets, and Barbara has hers.)
It’s is a contraction of it is, whereas its is a possessive pronoun.

It’s the most complicated problem I’ve had to solve.
Its art collection was lost in the fire.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 156 2/25/08 11:03:08 AM

EXERCISE
23·7
For each sentence, explain why the apostrophe is used (or not used).
1. Paul’s and Janet’s painting techniques are very different.
2. The cassettes were sent overseas by a company in Florida.
3. It’s time the dog had its walk.
4. Wireless keyboards have been used since the 1990s.
5. The Doors’ second single was an instant hit.
6. Peter and Margaret’s car is navy blue.
EXERCISE
23·8
Insert apostrophes where needed. If no apostrophe is needed, mark it with an X.
1. The sergeants boots were always the shiniest of all.

2. She really likes that about the 80s.
3. A doctors quick intervention can save a life.
4. There are times when the UNs presence has prevented armed conflict.
5. Whos winning today?
6. Our planes took off at the same time.
7. By the 1940s, jazz was already becoming an important musical movement.
8. Natalies new bicycle is red and yellow.
9. The Cutlips cat wandered into our garage this morning.
10. Her mothers and fathers wills were drafted by the lawyer.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 157 2/25/08 11:03:08 AM

Quotation marks
Quotation marks are used for the title of a short work, to indicate direct quotations, to indicate a
part of a large work, and to emphasize certain, often ironic words. Quotation marks indicate the
direct comments of a speaker or remarks taken from written material.
“The Raven” is the title of a poem written by Edgar Allan Poe. (title of a short work)
Mark Twain first became known for his short story “The Celebrated Jumping Frog of
Calaveras County.” (title of a short work)
She said, “There they go again,” as the children raced back outside to play.
(direct quotation)
In an article from last week’s Economist, I read that “10% of the world’s population controls
90% of the wealth.” (direct quotation)
“When Business Mergers No Longer Work” was an article published in the New
Yorker. (part of a longer work)
I agree, the theater play was so “entertaining” that I slept through most of it.
His latest painting is proof of “his creative skills” and worth every cent of the $20 he wants
for it.
Single quotation marks are used to enclose a quotation within another quotation. The first
quote is noted in the standard way, with double quotation marks, and the embedded quote is
noted with single quotation marks.
In his speech, Charles brought up an interesting point: “If Adam Smith wrote that
‘the subjects of every state ought to contribute towards the support of the government,
as nearly as possible, in proportion to their respective abilities,’ then why are people
clamoring for a flat tax?”
EXERCISE
23·9
Insert quotation marks where needed. If none are needed, mark it with an X.
1. I met a woman who said she could make magic potions.

2. From what I hear, Joseph said the turning point in the novel is when Carlito tells his
cousin, You should have never worked with Francisco in the first place; he’s not to be
trusted.
3. She read The Palm-Tree and was very moved by the poem.
4. What do you think of John Coltrane’s tune My Favorite Things?
5. The morning newspaper mentioned that there might be snow tonight with a chance
of hail and strong winds.
6. His father asked him, What would you like to do this summer, work or travel?
7. As Patrick walked away, she hesitated and then screamed, Will you go out with me?
8. The title of the book, How to Find Happiness Quickly, intrigued me.
9. We analyzed the play The Flies by Jean-Paul Sartre and his famous essay Americans and
Their Myths.
10. The song Organ Donor is best qualified as groundbreaking.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 158 2/25/08 11:03:08 AM

11. The photographer encouraged the model by telling her, You’re doing really well, but I want
you to relax a little more. When the camera is pointed at you, just imagine someone is
saying to you, You’re the only one that can do this, and I want you to believe it!
The hyphen and the dash

A hyphen is used to divide or syllabify words at the end of a line when the word runs over to the
beginning of the next line. It also connects individual words to form a compound word.
Hyphens cannot be used to divide one-syllable words: thought, through, weight, and so on.
Hyphens can be used to divide words of two or more syllables.
fun-damental
funda-mental
fundamen-tal
If a word already contains a hyphen, it is generally syllabified using that hyphen.
a mid-life crisis
a cross-cultural conference
A number of everyday words and expressions are hyphenated: U.S. Social Security numbers
(666-86-3454), telephone numbers (555-342-4536), and certain compound nouns (two-step) and
adjectives (two-way). Following are examples of hyphenated everyday words.
hard-driving
long-winded
out-of-pocket
pitch-dark
six-cycle
twice-told
Yves Saint-Laurent
When dividing words at the end of a line, leave at least two letters at the end of the line
and bring at least three letters down to the beginning of the next line.
A dash interrupts the flow of a sentence and sets a separate thought off from the rest of a
sentence.
If you find yourself in a dangerous situation, use the two Bs method—back off and breathe
in—because otherwise you might panic.
She was thinking of ways of running away—how could she have agreed to be part of this
nonsense—but she was stuck.
EXERCISE
23·10
Insert hyphens and dashes where needed.
1. Eric could not figure out how to get out of the maze how silly and useless he felt!
2. The touchdown scored by the Patriots was an 83 yard play.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 159 2/25/08 11:03:08 AM

3. They were once considered wishy washy.
4. Carla was about to close the front door and thought to herself do I have everything I need
in the bag?
5. The tight lipped receptionist told the reporters nothing.
6. She detests animal testing, so she never buys Yves Saint Laurent products.
7. Thirty two of the 52 figure skaters missed at least one of their jumps.
8. The Security Council voted against three crucial resolutions an armed attack, a forced
embargo, and unified retaliation.
Parentheses and brackets

Parentheses enclose explanatory material, supplemental material, or any added information that
could clarify the text it refers to. They are placed at the beginning and end of the enclosed text.
The museum demolition that began in 1993 (and ended in 1996) was a sad reminder of how
suddenly historical buildings can be taken away.
Parentheses can be used in text references.
The death toll of Hurricane Katrina was staggering (see Table 5.7).
Parentheses can be used to set off a list of elements.
The green screen on your left indicates (1) the wind speed, (2) the outside temperature,
(3) the atmospheric pressure, and (4) the humidity ratio.
Brackets enclose editorial comments and corrections.
These painting copies [reproduced from the original artworks that burned in the fire of 1954]
are listed as some of the most expensive art of the exposition.
The students prefer Milton over him [Shakespeare].
The president said, “The illiteracy level of our children are [sic] appalling.”
Brackets can also be used to replace a set of parentheses within a set of parentheses.
During his trial, Fidel Castro stated, “None of you are entitled to condemn, you’ll see,
history will absolve me!” (See Fidel Castro’s speech “History Will Absolve Me”
[October 16, 1953].)
EXERCISE
23·11
Insert parentheses and brackets where needed.
1. The Skibby Chronicle published anonymously in the 1530s but now believed to be the work
of Poul Helgesen describes Danish history from 1047 to 1534.
2. As members of the book club, we had to read The Stranger Albert Camus 1913–1960 and
discuss the novelist’s concept of the absurd.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 160 2/25/08 11:03:09 AM

3. According to historical accounts, the first bridge over the Chattahoochee River there
Columbus, Georgia was built by John Goodwin in 1832–1833.
4. They were told there was a heavy load of work that they would have to deal with during
the semester: They would have to 1 take two three-hour exams, 2 read 13 books, and
3 write a 50-page essay.
5. Thomas Hart Benton 1888–1975 finished his famous Indiana Murals in 1932.
6. Some scholars argue that Michelangelo noted Italian painter and sculptor 1475–1564 was
the quintessential Renaissance man.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 161 2/25/08 11:03:09 AM

Capitalization, numbers,
·24 · and italics
Capitalization
The first word of a sentence is always capitalized.
John hurried to the drugstore.
She always traveled with too much luggage.
Have you spent a lot of time abroad?
Sometimes, I wish I were a rock star.
Wealthy people are not always intelligent people.
Proper nouns are always capitalized. If the proper noun is the name of a na-
tion, the corresponding nouns referring to the nation’s people and language are
also capitalized.
PROPER NAMES
Joanna, Laurie, Paul, Sebastian, Tyler Johnson

COUNTRY NATIONALITY LANGUAGE
Germany German German

Spain Spaniard Spanish
Korea Korean Korean
Civil, military, religious, and professional titles, even when abbreviated, are
capitalized when followed by a person’s name.
Pope Benedict XVI
President Bill Clinton
Professor Gibbons
Rabbi Dahan
Dr. Joanna Hughes
Ms. Gloria Graham
Rev. Lewis
Sir Winston Churchill
When a person is addressed by his or her professional title, the title is
capitalized.
We beg you, General, to take our opinion into consideration.
Madam President, I’d like to know what your budget proposal is.
The pronoun I is always capitalized. This is also true of the interjection O.
Yesterday, I saw Megan in her wedding dress, and O, what a sight she was!
162
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 162 2/25/08 11:03:09 AM

Geographical names are capitalized.
the Allegheny Mountains
the Champs-Élysées
the Danube
El Rastro
Madrid
the Mediterranean Sea
the Mississippi River
North Korea
the Pacific Ocean
the Sahara Desert
the Tai Po River
the Twin Cities
Washington, D.C.
Religions, holy books, believers (as a group), holy days, and terms that refer to deities are
capitalized.
Hinduism, Hindu, Brahman, Shiva
Islam, Koran, Muslim, Ramadan, Allah
Christianity, the Bible, Christian, Christmas, God
Names of organizations, institutions, government agencies, companies, as well as their
abbreviations, acronyms, and shorter versions of their names, are capitalized.
the ACLU
Alpha Delta Kappa
Boy Scouts of America
the Red Cross
the FCC
NYPD
UNESCO
IBM
the Rand Corp.
the Yanks
Days of the week, months of the year, and holidays are capitalized. The seasons, however, are
not usually capitalized.
Sunday
Monday
April
October
Veterans Day
Thanksgiving
summer
winter
Historical documents, events, periods, and cultural movements are capitalized.
Declaration of Independence
Magna Carta
World War II
the Renaissance
Cubism
unit 24 Capitalization, numbers, and italics 163
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 163 2/25/08 11:03:09 AM

However, ideologies and related terms not used as part of a proper-noun phrase are not
capitalized.
IDEOLOGIES democracy, democrat, democratic; communism, communist
PROPER NOUNS German Democratic Republic, Communist China
Names of trademarked merchandise are capitalized.
Adbusters
Adidas
Monopoly
Nike
Oreo
Post-it
Puffs
Velcro
Yahoo
Words derived from proper names are capitalized.
Machiavellian
Europeanization
Americanized
The titles of poems, songs, movies, books, plays, and essays are capitalized. Articles, con-
junctions, and prepositions are not capitalized, unless they are the first word of the title. Preposi-
tions are capitalized if they are the last word of the title.
“The Second Coming”
“Take the ‘A’ Train”
The Motorcycle Diaries
The Grapes of Wrath
Love’s Labour’s Lost
“How the Palestinian-Jewish Conflict Began”
The first word in quoted material is usually capitalized.
She turned around and screamed, “Is there anybody out there!”
A timid voice asked, “Is there more food, sir?”
The names of heavenly bodies, including the planets, are capitalized, but the words earth,
moon, and sun are not.
Andromeda Galaxy
Milky Way
Scorpio
Jupiter
The earth was parched and cracked; the drought had done its work.
The earth is the third planet from the sun.
General compass directions are not capitalized unless they refer to specific geographical
locations.
Lyon is south of Paris.
They walked in an easterly direction.
The red team represents the West.
They came from the South.
They came from the Southern states.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 164 2/25/08 11:03:10 AM

The names of man-made objects, such as bridges, planes, spacecraft, ships, roads, monu-
ments, and buildings, are capitalized.
the Brooklyn Bridge
the Spirit of St. Louis
Apollo 13
the Santa María
Interstate 35
the Lincoln Memorial
the Museum of Natural Science
the Sears Tower
EXERCISE
24 ·1
Rewrite each sentence, using correct capitalization.
1. teresa malcolm is president of the ford rotary club.
2. in three weeks, we will be traveling through france, switzerland, and spain.
3. the night sky was so clear we could see the entire moon, venus, and jupiter.
4. as soon as he got home, patrick felt like putting on his new adidas swimsuit.
5. the second world war lasted nearly six years.
6. the novel we bought at the airport was the da vinci code.
7. i visited the empire state building when i was in new york.
8. thelma and john saw the launch of the uss enterprise.
9. the naacp is a prominent organization based in the united states.
10. they told her, “we don’t like the proposal you’ve written.”
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 165 2/25/08 11:03:10 AM

EXERCISE
24 ·2
Rewrite each sentence, using correct capitalization.
1. marilyn is the president of the ladies of grace at her church.
2. some restaurants in los angeles serve americanized european food.
3. members of all faiths gathered on campus to protest, including christians, jews, muslims,
and hindus.
4. “the red wheelbarrow” by william carlos williams is one of the most profound poems
i’ve read.
5. they came from the eastern states in search of gold.
6. we read of mice and men last week for class.
7. the cia agent said he often works with fbi investigators, as well as with representatives
of the faa.
8. a speaker from the national transportation safety board gave a presentation on the most
common accidents that took place on interstate 66.
Numbers
Whole numbers from one through ten are usually spelled out in sentences; whole numbers larger
than ten are written as numerals. However, this is a style—not grammar—issue, and the main
objective should be consistency.
Eight in ten voters were disappointed.
This hospital employs 437 nurses.
A number that begins a sentence is spelled out and capitalized.
Twenty-eight thousand people crossed the border.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 166 2/25/08 11:03:10 AM

Very large numbers can be expressed in several ways.
30,000 political prisoners
30 thousand political prisoners
thirty thousand political prisoners
Numbers used in business documents or in legal writing are often spelled out and written as
numerals to avoid confusion.
The broker’s profits are not to exceed forty thousand (40,000) dollars.
Uses of numbers
Numbers can be used to express time, dates, and periods of time.
3 p.m. ⬃ 3:00 p.m. ⬃ three o’clock in the afternoon
July 23, 1976
the seventeenth century ⬃ the 17th century
the ’80s ⬃ the eighties ⬃ the 1980s
Numbers are used in addresses.
1949 Yucca Mountain Road
1600 Liberal Lane
Chicago, IL 60601
Numbers are used in decimals, percentages, pages and chapters of books, scenes in a play,
temperature, geographic coordinates, money, and forms of identification.
0.0987, 20.75
17 percent ⬃ 17% ⬃ seventeen percent
page 34, chapter 45
Act V, Scene III, lines 108–110
36° C ⬃ 36 degrees Celsius
latitude 45° N
$5.30 ⬃ five dollars and thirty cents
Queen Elizabeth II, Henry VIII
Channel 8
Area 51
EXERCISE
24 ·3
Rewrite each sentence, using the numbers correctly. If the sentence is correct and no
changes are required, mark an X in the blank.
1. An important date to remember is November seventeen 1959.
2. The city paid $ thirty-four point seven million to build the tower.
3. It took 5 out of 9 members to reach a consensus.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 167 2/25/08 11:03:10 AM

4. In Europe, the nineteen seventies were marked by social and political change.
5. Turn to page one hundred and nine, which should be chapter twelve.
6. The morning temperature was forty-seven degrees Fahrenheit, or 8 degrees Celsius.
7. The address listed in the phone book was 3465 Milkway Avenue.
8. They drove down Interstate thirty-four to the lake.
9. The Second Battle of Bull Run was fought from August twenty-eight to thirty, eighteen
sixty-two.
Italics
Italics are used to make a word or group of words stand out in order to give them emphasis.
Notre Dame de Paris is an amazing cathedral.
Generally, a word processor is used to create italic text, but in handwriting, it is common to
underline words that ordinarily would be italicized.
Italics are often used to indicate the titles of books, newspapers, magazines, plays, lengthy
poems, comic strips, software, paintings, sculpture, movies, and genus/species references.
Gone with the Wind InDesign CS3
The New York Times Guernica
Science News Venus de Milo
All’s Well That Ends Well When Harry Met Sally …
The Song of Hiawatha Drosophila melanogaster
Doonesbury
Italics are also used to set off foreign words adapted into English. Most of these words and
phrases are still italicized, because they remain foreign to most English speakers.
coup de grâce prix fixe
je ne sais quoi pro bono
persona non grata verboten
Some foreign words, however, are not italicized, because they have been integrated into En-
glish and are commonly used. This generally happens after widespread adoption and use by the
mass media and the publishing industry. The following list includes some of these words.
bazaar cuisine ski
cappuccino igloo soprano
casino karaoke taffeta
chauffeur rodeo yogurt
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 168 2/25/08 11:03:10 AM

Italics are used to identify court cases.
Brown v. Board of Education
Roe v. Wade
Italics are used in algebraic expressions.
X ⫺ Y ⫽ 23
Italics are used for the names of spacecraft, satellites, and ships.
Sputnik was launched into orbit this morning from a base in Kazakh SSR.
Launched in 1959, Vanguard 2 helped to map the shape of the earth.
Sink the Bismarck!
EXERCISE
24 ·4
Rewrite each sentence, using correct capitalization and italicization. Also, rewrite
numbers that are used incorrectly.
1. We installed windows vista on our desktop today.
2. Jason’s spanish literature class read Miguel de Cervantes’ Don Quixote.
3. They reviewed the case of The People v. Robert Page Anderson for their law class.
4. He invited ten of his closest friends, but more than ninety people showed up.
5. Did you get a copy of the atlantic monthly?
6. The lawyer working on Miller v. Wilson offered his services pro bono.
7. The baton rouge advocate gave us information about visiting the garden district.
8. The detective speculated about the criminal’s modus operandi.
05 (120-169) ch 21-24.indd 169 2/25/08 11:03:11 AM

appendix
Review exercises
EXERCISE
A·1
Underline the entire auxiliary verb in each sentence.
1. We have to go grocery shopping.

2. He has to be able to run five miles in less than half an hour.
3. He is able to speak Persian.
4. He should be working a lot harder if he wishes to pass the exam.
5. I had better see a dermatologist.
6. She is my friend, so I am going to have to tell her.
7. I am going to write a novel based on our family.
8. I had better be able to pass this driving test.
EXERCISE
A·2
Correct the error in each sentence.
1. Is impossible to learn Arabic quickly.

2. Eating everything, we decided to go to a restaurant.

3. Paul finished to work early today.

4. They have succeeded in to becoming rich.

5. I am tired of work so hard just to make money.

170
06_Appendix.indd 170 2/7/19 10:53 AM

6. They look forward to meet you.

7. I am going to try to prevent you from to drink too much.

8. Shannon is interested in learn more about Artificial Intelligence.

9. To go willingly is to shown courage.

10. They wanted come earlier, but their flight was delayed.

11. Laura hopes going to Iceland next year, even if she knows it’s so cold there.

12. Are you enjoy yourself?

EXERCISE
A·3
Complete each sentence with the appropriate tense of the verb in parentheses.
1. adrian: Hi, Loretta. (you 1 meet) my close friend Kerry?

loretta: No, I don’t believe I
(ever 1 have) the pleasure
of making his acquaintance.
adrian: Well, let me introduce you!
2. beth: Wait! What (you 1 do)?
adrian: I
(try) to pull out whatever
(jam) the blender.

beth: You really should not (put) your hand in there while
it’s still plugged in. You (probably 1 hurt) yourself.
3. adrian: There’s Loretta.
beth: Where?
adrian: She (sit) on that bench in the shade.

beth: Oh yes, I
(see) her now.
She (certainly 1 look) focused. Let’s go bother her anyway.
Review exercises 171
06_Appendix.indd 171 2/7/19 10:53 AM

4. kerry: What (be) wrong with Adrian?
beth: While he
(run), his shoelaces
(come) untied and he (fall).
kerry: I
(not 1 believe) it! (be)
you serious?
beth: Yes. I’m not kidding you. I wish I (be), but I’m not.
kerry: Poor Adrian, he
(seem) to
(suffer) quite a bit too.
5. paul: (you 1 take) an Economics component this semester?
patricia: No, I (not 1 be).
paul: (you 1 ever 1 take) it?
patricia: Yes, I (have).
paul: When (you 1 take) it?
patricia: In 2006.
paul: Who (teach) the class back then?
patricia: Dr. Bumshelgell.
paul: I
(take) his class next semester.
(be) he a good professor?

patricia: When I (take) the class, he
(be) very pleasant to work with. His class (be) very difficult
to pass, but it’s well worth it.
6. daniel: I (spend) some time in Prague last month.
I (never 1 be) there before.
jesse: What (you 1 do) while you were there?
daniel: My girlfriend and I
(drive) around, randomly stopping
in places we (think) looked interesting.
7. The weather (be) terrible lately. It
(rain) off and on for a whole week, and for two days the temperature
(drop) below ten degrees. It (be)
in the low 40s right now. Just yesterday, the sun (shine) and
the weather was as pleasant as can be. It almost seems like the weather
(change) all the time, and one never
(know) what to expect. At this point,
I (be) ready for anything. When I wake up tomorrow
morning, maybe everything (freeze).
172 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 172 2/7/19 10:53 AM

8. brian: I (go) to a concert last night.
gregory: (it 1 be) any fun?
brian: I
(not 1 do) think so, but Patricia
(enjoy) it quite a bit.
gregory: Who (you 1 see)?
brian: Postal Service. I
(never 1 see) them perform live before.
gregory: Oh! I
(see) them in concert, too.
I (go) to their concert when they were on tour a couple
of years ago. I (think) it (be)
a great show!
brian: Well, I (not 1 think) so.
EXERCISE
A·4
1. It’s the end of spring break, so Peter is going back to school next week.
2. We should open the window.
3. Allison is going to Austin next weekend.
4. We don’t have to paint all the kitchen walls tonight.
5. Are we supposed to get there before nightfall?
6. Josh should have to pay for all the groceries.
7. Patricia is going to open a vintage record store next month.
8. Since last week, I have been running every morning.
9. Bureaucrats should be able to stay polite at all times.
10. He has been playing the drums all morning.
EXERCISE
A·5
1. Her mother recommended that they (stay) inside until it

stopped snowing.
2. She really wanted her room (paint) in the same color as her
sister’s.
06_Appendix.indd 173 2/7/19 10:53 AM

3. It was such a long train ride that our friend suggested that we
(take) a few games with us.
4. This table should (move) to the living room, that way more
people can sit around it.
5. His aunt recommends that they not (eat) too much sugar
before going to sleep.
6. The drivers recommend that the bus route (cancel) until that
road is repaired.
7. His father asks that she (be) cautious while driving her
brother’s new car.
8. It is very important that students (teach) and then
(test) so that they can improve.
9. She demanded that she (allow) to see her husband, even if
he was still asleep.
10. It is important that he (not + be) late for his job interview.
11. Their teacher requested that the students (practice) their
English as often as possible.
12. My parents requested that I (not + allow) to stay at the party
after midnight.
13. The artist made sure that his brush (be) clean before
painting.
14. It is important that you (meet) with me tomorrow in the
morning.
15. It is imperative that they (read) to as often as they can.
EXERCISE
A·6
In each sentence, the verb phrase contains a grammatical error or has an element
missing. Rewrite the sentence correctly. There may be more than one correct answer.
example Mike has visit Philadelphia twice this past month.

Mike has visited Philadelphia twice this past month.
1. Kenji been studying Portuguese.

2. Juan has live in Madrid for two years.

3. He has to came back to meet us here.

174 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 174 2/7/19 10:53 AM

4. My father, Raoul, who studied Mathematics with my uncle, looking for a job.

5. After work, Anjali will going to the pub.

6. Last week, Mark was able to visited the president’s office.

7. The soil is dry. They will not are able to plant vegetables there.

8. He doesn’t likes his neighbors, because they’re too noisy.

9. They didn’t had any problems with the rental car.

10. I have been learned a lot since I began doing my exercises.

11. Are you think of buying another car soon?

12. She was visited many monuments when she was in Rome.

13. I didn’t saw a single beautiful sunset.

14. He couldn’t forgot her after the love affair.

15. He always attempting to catch the students cheating.

16. Sometimes when I cross the street, I don’t looked to see if a car is coming.

17. I’ve thinking about it for a long time now.

18. I feel my English grammar might improving.

19. Mrs. Gilmore was sad, because her son had to went back to the front lines.

20. All my friends can helps me become a better person.

06_Appendix.indd 175 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·7
Each sentence may have a noun or pronoun with an error in number. Write the corrected
word in the blank. If the sentence is correct, mark an X in the blank.
1. Some of us wanted to be talented musicians, and others wanted to be famous painter.

2. Good professors like graduate students to be outspoken in their class.

3. Each person should make up his or her own mind.

4. The 50 states of the United States all have their own law.

5. When he was elected, the president did what he had promised: He gave more power
to the syndicates and more power to the worker themselves.

6. Talented people who come to Europe to study should then return to their countries
to help improve their society.

7. I like to travel, because it helps me understand the custom of other countries.

EXERCISE
A·8
Rewrite each sentence, correcting the grammatical error(s), if any. If the sentence is
correct, mark an X in the blank.
1. Hello you. How are you?

2. It’s such a nice city to visit. There is so many things to do.

3. One should always look after one’s family.

4. Some will study in Germany; other, instead, will studied somewhere else in Europe.

5. I am in love with you and want us to stay together. Whichever you go, I will follow you.

176 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 176 2/7/19 10:53 AM

6. I am not sure of what will wrong with Nancy but somethings is bothering her.

7. I wasn’t here but mom told me somebody called you last night.

8. It won’t be a party just for friends. Anybodies who wants to come are welcome.

9. It’s unlikely the train will leave on time. Many of the passengers knows that.

10. Some work in the evenings, but much work in the daytime.

11. No one understands me other than my closest friend.

12. I asked Peter where they were going this summer and he tell me they is traveling to Paris.
It seems like everyone are visiting France this year.

13. I’m sorry, no one speak Mandarin here.

14. Karen doesn’t like going out with Eric. He generally drink quite a lots.

EXERCISE
A·9
Complete each sentence by supplying the missing preposition.
1. Everyone is schedule, so the project won’t be completed on time.

2. Such behavior is her.
3. We walked and walked hours.
4. She has earned a place the best heart surgeons in Switzerland.
5. He was named a character of a movie his parents loved.
6. Let’s meet Saturday. Does that work for you?
7. Christian and Isabel are going to Costa Rica September.
8. She’s working setting up the office.
9. I’m getting the subway as we speak.
10. I’m going vacation next month.
06_Appendix.indd 177 2/7/19 10:53 AM

11. Catherine is free five o’clock on.
12. Charles and her were both born June.
13. Don’t they know right wrong any longer?
14. That man has spent his entire life politics.
15. You can use your credit card, but you can also pay for it cash.
16. They have always lived privileged people.
17. Seth just got the plane.
18. The temperature has been normal the entire summer.
19. She always takes a walk Mondays.
20. I live the train station.
21. Our office is only a few blocks here.
22. He thinks highly her artistry.
23. There are two hours to go before we reach Brisbane.
24. The garage is right the corner from here.
25. I’ll go to the theatre meeting them for dinner, not after.
26. The construction runs all the street.
27. We try to get in bed eleven every night.
28. We’ll see him the afternoon.
EXERCISE
A·10
Complete each sentence, supplying the missing auxiliary verb form.
1. Sherlock will meeting with his associate soon to discuss his theory.
2. Watson knew that he should looking harder for clues.
3. The murderer could tried to keep his prints off the doorknob.
4. They captured the murderer by April 6.
5. He could not understand how the police might found out where he lived.
6. Inspector Pretz pushed Jack into the prison cell, because he not want
to take any risks.
7. Now when I see Watson, I just tell him, “You are a genius!” because he could
found a way to solve the mystery.
8. When Sherlock Holmes working on a case, he tries to use every little bit
of information he can get his hands on.
178 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 178 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·11
Each item should be a complete, grammatical sentence. If it is, mark an X in the blank.
If it contains an error, describe the error, and then write a correct, grammatical sentence
based on the item.
1. Teaching math to smart students.

2. Listen!

3. If you want to observe what is taking place.

4. Last week, she began writing her new book.

5. The European Union.

6. I already ran three miles

7. before I walked in, I rang the bell, hoping someone would open the door.

8. Many different photographs in that dusty, black book.

9. Has many children.

10. Open the garage before you leave.

11. The Panama Canal can be a dangerous zone.

12. Writing complete sentences is easy.

13. If your friend is a lawyer, doesn’t have to worry about finding a job.

14. Madrid it is the capital of Spain.

15. Also, he very smart, quiet, and polite.

06_Appendix.indd 179 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·12
Complete each sentence with the appropriate answer, (a) or (b) or (c).
example They started leaving .

(a) one after the other
(b) one than
(c) themselves
They started leaving one after the other. (a)
1. One of the office managers is from Peru; are from here.

(a) one
(b) the others
(c) they
2. Don’t trust them. Whatever say, it is simply not true!
(a) anyone
(b) one
(c) they
3. The richer you become, the more are expected to be generous.
(a) you
(b) one
(c) yourself
4. They call almost daily.
(a) each other
(b) every other
(c) anyone
5. The dominoes started falling .
(a) one another
(b) one after the other
(c) every other
6. They call each other day.
(a) one after the other
(b) one another
(c) every other
7. The older one becomes, the more is supposed to eat healthier food.
(a) you
(b) one
(c) the other

180 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 180 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·13
If it is not, write one or more correct sentences based on the item.
example To cook that much rice. She’ll need more water.

To cook that much rice, she’ll need more water.
1. When I was younger. I thought the earth was flat.

2. My ambition is to become a pilot.

3. My favorite color was red. Because it reminded me of my sister.

4. He hates horror movies. Because he gets scared immediately.

5. Now I realize that dreaming is not enough.

6. She is back it’s the end of spring semester at UCLA.

7. To paint this wall. You need a special brush.

8. Elvis is over there. With Tupac and Biggie and they look happy.

9. You will get a free subscription in addition you will receive a free towel. A matching
bathrobe, a sticker, and a silver pen.

10. Once you have done all your stretching. Run for two miles or so.

11. As soon as you get there, make sure you take a right.

12. When the water is boiling. Put the pasta in the pot.

13. After the sun comes up can begin hiking up the mountain.

06_Appendix.indd 181 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·14
Complete each sentence by using the appropriate subordinating or coordinating
prepositions.
1. We’re running late so I’ll can you we get there.

2. we may not succeed, we’ll try again.
3. Please send me a message you leave.
4. that is the case, what should we do?
5. Richard always goes to the theatre he likes it.
6. I am not bored, am I tired.
7. The wine is too cold delicious.
8. Daniel Patrick should pay for that, not you.
9. I like classical music, I cannot listen to Mozart’s compositions
anymore.
10. Beth is not well, she’s not joining us for coffee.
11. Einstein really liked physics really liked art.
12. Our summers are very warm, everyone knows.
13. I tripped on the sidewalk I ran to try and catch the bus.
14. Carl and Lisa decided to go out they had finished dinner.
15. she finds programming easy, she prefers to study anything but
computer science.
EXERCISE
A·15
example I hope that Catherine drives (drive) carefully, because the roads are slippery.
1. I recommend that Pablo (promote) to a managerial position.

2. We demand that you (give) us the location of the treasure.
3. She requested that we not (knock) on her door after midnight.
4. Mrs. Taylor insists that he (be) careful with his new watch.
5. It was such a sunny day outside that my mom suggested we
(have) lunch in the park.
6. It is essential that hate crimes (study) and eventually
(stop).
7. I request that I (allow) to leave the room.
182 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 182 2/7/19 10:53 AM

8. The students recommended that the finals (postpone) until the
end of summer.
9. The plastic surgeon requested that he (remain) in his house until
the infection has healed.
10. He insisted that the puppy (name) after his dead cat.
11. Their coach recommended that they (take) a week off.
12. I suggest that all citizens (write) a letter to the president.
13. It is crucial that I (meet) with you tomorrow.
14. It is essential that he (talk) to the professor about his assignment.
15. It is necessary that all of you (join) him at five o’clock sharp.
16. The theater director insisted that his stage (be) perfect.
17. It is very important that no one (admit) backstage without a pass.
18. It is essential that they (not 1 be) late to their meeting.
19. It is essential that he (return) home immediately.
20. She specifically asked that I (not 1 tell) anyone about the treasure.
EXERCISE
A·16
Turn each sentence into a negative one and an interrogative one, changing the verb into
the right tense:
example They’re traveling to Europe.

Haven’t they traveled to Europe?
1. He fixed the garage door.

2. John gets her sense of humor.

3. British people say that.

4. She speaks to the doctor.

5. You do it.

06_Appendix.indd 183 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·17
Rewrite each sentence, correcting the error in subject-verb agreement.
1. The private and public sectors in Africa needs to work closely together.

2. It is undeniable that armed conflict make things worse.

3. They sit on the bench and feel that the judge condemn them for no apparent reason.

4. Many families in this area who doesn’t own houses feels that they should get
interest-free loans.

EXERCISE
A·18
Complete each passive sentence with the correct form of one of the verbs listed below.
build expect offer spell

cause frighten order surprise
confuse invent report surround
divide kill schedule wear
example An island is surrounded by water.
1. A necklace around your neck.

2. The telephone by the American scientist Alexander Graham
Bell.
3. Is sitting really with a double t?
4. Even though it took almost 20 years, the bridge by next
month.
5. I doubt the train will be coming in late. The monitor announced that it
to arrive on time.
6. I still can’t understand the math problem. Yesterday in class, I
by the professor’s explanation.
184 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 184 2/7/19 10:53 AM

7. The children in the middle of the night, because a squirrel
managed to get inside their tent. They thought it was a monster.
8. Last week, she a job at a local record store, but she had
already decided to work as a waitress.
9. In spite of his knee injury, he to play in the championship
game.
10. The plane crash in the newspapers last week.
11. They read about the hunter who by the wild animal.
12. He enlisted in the army, but he to return home because of
a back injury.
13. Nathalie’s house burned down. The fire by lightning.
14. The team is too big, so it into two smaller teams.
EXERCISE
A·19
Rewrite each sentence, correcting the grammatical error(s), if any. If the sentence
is correct, mark an X in the blank.
1. When we get older, you can do a lot of thing.

2. Pedro ate a few piece of cheese with his enchilada.

3. He read some book at the public library before they closed.

4. Last year, I gave him Star Wars and Indiana Jones for Christmas, but I don’t know
if he ever watched those movie.

5. There are too many person in this car.

6. My little sister is only three year old, but she seems older.

7. We had not been to Portugal in six year.

8. He is an intelligent and gifted 30-year-old actor.

06_Appendix.indd 185 2/7/19 10:53 AM

9. If you want to form your own opinion, you should read many news articles and watch
many kind of documentaries.

10. In addition to the art gallery, there are a lot of beautiful place to visit.

EXERCISE
A·20
Complete each sentence with the appropriate reflexive, reciprocal, or relative pronouns.
1. That is a nation influence over international affairs has been

greatly reduced.
2. Counting on others is great but one should always look after .
3. The situation will work out, even if by times it seems unlikely.
4. It doesn’t matter what others think, she considers to be
skilled and hardworking.
5. The song, style is very jazzy, has been playing on the radio a lot.
6. The novel I read yesterday was more interesting than the one
I read a few weeks ago.
7. My car, is brand new, is always giving me problems.
8. They are the couple are coming to our wedding.
9. We tried to do it , but couldn’t. In the end, we had to hire a
plumber.
10. They seem to only worry about , so it makes it difficult to
become their friends.
11. I feel rather nervous about hiking alone. I’m not sure I can do it by .
12. The woman plays Nala in the Lion King musical is my sister.
13. The jacket I bought yesterday is much too tight, I have to
return it.
14. My cousin and his fiancée really adore .
15. She always does things !
16. I love the piano piece you performed last night.
17. Those believe in him will soon find out that they have been
duped.
18. They bought only they absolutely needed.
19. Do you live by ?
186 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 186 2/7/19 10:53 AM

20. is really shocking is that they didn’t even mention a word
about the accident.
21. To did you speak to earlier on the phone?
22. The shelf on I place these books is rather old and dusty.
EXERCISE
A·21
Rewrite each sentence, correcting the grammatical error(s).
1. She will going to Dallas to visit her brother.

2. Patrick has know me since I was six years old.

3. He been living in Lisbon for years but we still keeping in touch via e-mail.

4. When I get to Peter’s house, he will have to opens the front door.

5. I soon noticed that Paul didn’t drove very well. Among other things, he didn’t respected the
speed limit on the highways.

6. Paul knows that he should taking driving classes.

7. If he were move back home he could helped his mom more, and he could to take care
of her on a daily basis.

8. Vanessa should to do her shopping at Trader Joe’s.

9. I taking the GRE next month and I am quite nervous.

06_Appendix.indd 187 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·22
Complete each sentence with the appropriate form of the verbs listed below.
example The movie when you called me, so I couldn’t answer. (begin)
The movie had begun when you called me, so I couldn’t answer.
1. We the house when you got there. (leave)
2. When we arrived, the band playing. (just + finish)
3. Yes, she it long before you asked her to. (already + do)
4. It looks like they the apartment before we arrived. (already +

clean)
5. While he out yesterday, she came to visit.
EXERCISE
A·23
1. In terms of transportation, cars are a basic parts of modern life.

2. The automobile have made it possible for people to travel many mile from their home.

3. Research has made great progress in the field of microbiology.

4. Students study more than they used to, and learn about more thing than they used to.

5. Life expectancy is much greater than it was a hundred year ago.

188 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 188 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·24
Rewrite each sentence, correcting the error in subject-verb agreement.
1. She is having so much fun at the live show but still think the ticket was too expensive.

2. It’s going to storm tonight so it’s likely the heavy rain will makes driving more difficult.

3. Many people who don’t vote during the recent elections now feels that they should have
taken the time to do it.

4. It is definitely her grandma’s secret ingredient that make that cake taste so good.

5. In case of an emergency landing, the airline crew and the passengers on the airplane
needs to remain calm.

6. She wait in line at the grocery store and wish it would go faster.

EXERCISE
A·25
Make a complete sentence by matching the parts in the two columns.
1. Once the movers were here, we had a. wash the dishes.
2. We weren’t sure about buying a new b. to reconsider.
television, but they got us
3. My teacher c. got me to learn more vocabulary.
4. Although he cooked, I also had him d. her to clean up her room.
5. She didn’t feel like it but her parents got e. them to empty the garage.
06_Appendix.indd 189 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·26
1. The ten districts in this city has decided to build more modern-looking buildings.

2. Some cities in Argentina surprise tourists with its architecture.

3. Often, the term “third-world country” make people think of crime and poverty.

4. Technology has been crucial in modern society.

5. The graduate courses are very difficult; you feel like everyone else understand and
you don’t.

6. Study a lot, and you will get many of the answer right.

7. If a student don’t understand the answer to his or her question, he or she should feels
comfortable enough to ask again.

8. All students have to take the two part of the exam.

9. These drill cannot prove the ability of the nurses, because the nurses simply executes
certain emergency procedures.

10. There are two kind of people in this company: honest persons and greedy persons.

11. There are many problem at my office, but one problem is the lack of motivation.

12. Any person whose parents are seriously sick worry about their health.

13. You can find many kind of people working in our offices.

190 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 190 2/7/19 10:53 AM

14. Italian ice cream are so delicious. I’m pretty sure you’ll like it.

15. When I first came to this hotel, I didn’t like the food, but now I like them very much.

16. That was the first time I bought my own furniture. I enjoyed picking them out, and I felt
like an adult.

17. The people who shares my apartment are friendly, but they’re messy.

18. There are six freshly planted tree on my street.

19. If you drive when you’re too tired, he might cause an accident.

20. I left my wallet and my keys on the counter. When I came back, I couldn’t find it anymore.

21. Everyone want to be successful and be in good healths.

22. Count the money again before you put them in the envelope.

23. Every people should help improve their neighborhood.

EXERCISE
A·27
Complete each passive sentence with the correct form of one of the verbs listed below.
separate • drive • build • bake • fire • offer • design

decide • begin • bother • complete • divided • cause
example Countries are separated by frontiers.
1. The car must around the block at least once a week,

otherwise the battery might die.
2. The Taj Mahal palace in India by Emperor Shah Jahan. Its
construction in 1632 and was
in 1643.
06_Appendix.indd 191 2/7/19 10:53 AM

3. She by all the noise the neighbors made. She had forgotten
to close the windows before going to sleep.
4. This class has too many students, so it into 3 different
groups.
5. Can a cake really without flour or sugar?
6. They heard about all the people who by the company.
7. The dress worn by Michelle Obama at the President’s inauguration
by Jason Wu.
8. The policemen and the ambulances were still blocking the street when I got back home.
The accident by a drunk driver.
9. A few days ago, Tina a managerial position, but she had
already she wanted to get a new job somewhere else.

EXERCISE
A·28
1. I had not seen my best friend in over twenty year.

2. There are not enough person to play this game.

3. In spite of his sore back, he still managed to win the championship.

4. When you’re off work, you are able to accomplish more personal task.

5. This record player was made thirty year ago, but it still work perfectly.

6. Her writing is rich and sophisticated for a 19-year-old writer.

7. If Pierre wants to learn how to cook, he should try out many recipe and try different type
of food.

8. Henry added a few spoon of sugar to his cup of tea.

9. This is not the only beautiful building in Madrid; there are many other architectural
landmark across the city.
192 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 192 2/7/19 10:53 AM

10. He rented some movie at the video store before they closed for the day.

EXERCISE
A·29
Complete each passive sentence by supplying the missing preposition.
1. Victor is done working late at night; he is going to try

changing his work schedule.
2. She was introduced my wife many years ago.
3. Is she worried his health?
4. Are you involved theatre or music?
5. He is married Julie.
6. We are filled joy and could not be happier he finally
graduated.
7. Peter and Maria are related my ex-wife, can you believe that?

EXERCISE
A·30
1. My mother never forgets to put her house keys in her purse before she leaves
the house.

2. Christine enjoys walking along the river. She likes that he’s so peaceful.

3. My boyfriend’s mother is an attorney. He works for important people.

4. If you want to purchase gloves, you can buy them online.

5. He needed a coffee table and a couch, but he decided he could live without it.

06_Appendix.indd 193 2/7/19 10:53 AM

6. My cousins are all younger than I, but she is taller than I am.

7. Japan is a small country. They have a long history.

8. Many person in the world are learning English. This person wants to improve his language
skills and get a better job.

9. If the tourists go to Puerto Rico, you should visit Old San Juan. You ought to try the food
too, because they’re delicious.

10. All his ideas comes from dreams, and he tries to make this dream reality.

11. Mrs. Hutchinson put his jacket back on.

EXERCISE
A·31
Make a complete sentence by matching the parts in the two columns.
1. We sure got through a. get going if we don’t want to miss the first
part of the show.
2. They’ve got to get b. of their plan to sell the company only
now.
3. The pollution in this city c. with that kind of behavior.
4. He must get up d. together this weekend for a drink?
5. Do Peter and Nancy want to get e. the best way to resolve an issue; on the
contrary.
6. At what time does Francis f. get up in the mornings to make breakfast?
7. It’s late and therefore it’s time to g. the nerve to do it.
8. Elan got wind h. is getting to me. I often feel so congested.
9. They will get nowhere i. to work right away.
10. Getting even is not always j. a very challenging period of time, and it
wasn’t easy.

194 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 194 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·32
1. This government has been running by Cardinal Richelieu since 1626.

2. I’m quite exciting to see her again.

3. I am so happy. Finally, I was pass the exam.

4. They’re not sure if the problem will be work out by tomorrow.

5. I’m interesting in advance technology.

6. The other colors have to be change.

7. We need to love someone and be love.

8. This question can be decide by taking into account all the information we’ve gathered.

9. I like the people there, because they’re very educate.

10. I like the way math is teaching in her class.

11. This store is locate on the third floor of the mall.

EXERCISE
A·33
Complete each sentence with an appropriate active- or passive-voice form
1. Before Paul graduated last December, he (offer) a position

with a consulting firm.
2. I’m sorry I’m so late. I (hold up) in traffic.
It (take) me an hour to get here instead of half an hour.
06_Appendix.indd 195 2/7/19 10:53 AM

3. According to a recent survey, out of every euro a German spends on groceries, 30 cents
(spend) on fruits and vegetables.
4. I was supposed to take my math test yesterday, but I
(not 1 admit) into the testing room, because they
(already 1 begin) the test.
5. Only two of us (work) in the laboratory this morning when
the explosion (occur).
6. It’s ten o’clock, so the mail should be here soon. The mailman
(generally 1 deliver) our mail before noon.
7. According to the cover of The Economist, solar energy (use)
extensively by the end of this century.
8. Paul (study) Spanish here for the last two years. His spoken
Spanish (finally 1 get) better, but he still needs to improve
his spelling.
9. Right now, tickets to the concert (sell) at the counter. If you
want to go to the concert, you should hurry up and buy some tickets before it’s too late.
10. John is a hero. His name will go down in history. He
(never 1 forget).
11. When you (arrive) at the bus station tomorrow morning,
you (meet) by my sister. She
(wear) a red shirt and a black skirt. She (stand) near the main
entrance. I’m sure you will be able to find her.
12. Today (be) a terrible day. First, I
(lose) my car keys. Then, I (drop) my glasses on the floor
while I (walk) and they (break).
Finally, my car (steal).
EXERCISE
A·34
1. As soon as she start walking in her new shoes, she realized that aren’t very comfortable.
The problem is that she had buy them on sale, so she couldn’t return or exchange it.

196 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 196 2/7/19 10:53 AM

2. Susan was upset that her grades is so low. She knows that she should studying more often.

3. It is so windy and rainy this morning. When I get home, I will have to closed the windows
and make sure the floor and furniture is still dry.

4. Matt has move to Iceland but we still talking on the phone every other week. We also try
to see ourselves twice a year. I still miss him very much

5. Charles and I have be friends since we were children. I meet him in kindergarten and a few
years later, his family move to our neighborhood.

6. He having minor surgery next month and is worried about it.

7. Sebastien should have his hair to done at my local hairdresser; I’m sure he would liked the
place and the service.

8. The first time Jessica went to the pool with her son Mark, she noticed that he couldn’t
swam very well.

9. They leaving their daughter Cara with a baby sitter for the first time since she was born. I
hope it go well because if not, they never leave the house again.

06_Appendix.indd 197 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·35
Complete each sentence with an appropriate active- or passive-voice form
1. The Amazon rainforest needs to be protected, because almost 20 percent of the planet’s
oxygen (produce) there.
2. Did you see that terrible car accident on the highway? Several of my friends
(see) it, including one who
(interview) by a police officer.
3. In Europe, certain prices (control) by the government.
Other prices (determine) by the market.
4. I am so mad! Earlier today, the wind (blow) my cap
off. I tried to catch it, because it was autographed by A-Rod and it
(cost) a lot of money.
5. Right now, Alice is in the hospital. She (treat) for a really
bad sunburn on her forehead.
6. Frostbite occurs when the skin (expose) to extremely cold
weather. It mostly (affect) hands, feet, noses, and ears.
7. Some researchers claim that Napoleon did not die of natural causes, but that he
(poison) instead.
8. The government used to finance this school. Today, it
(support) by the generous donations of alumni.
9. Charles was demoted this morning. He (tell) that he was
being relieved of his duties as general manager, because he wasn’t making enough money
for the company.
10. The game (probably 1 lose) by the opposing team
tomorrow. We’re a lot better than they are.
11. In 1989, photographs of Neptune (send) back to earth
by Voyager 2.
12. The World Health Organization hopes that a human vaccine for Ebola
(develop) soon. Vaccines
(already 1 test) successfully on monkeys.
198 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 198 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·36
1. Elizabeth got back into his car; she was not looked forward to the long drive back home.

2. The Chicago Bulls is a great team. They have won many championships.

3. Most of Susy’s neighbors are richer than her, but we are more selfish than she is.

4. If you want to get a better job, you’re going to have to quit yours.

5. If his family decides to purchase that house, she should make sure to carefully inspecting it
first. She should have the plumbing checked as well, because they’ll cost a lot of money to
repair.

6. Most of their money come from their investment, but the stock market is been unreliable.

7. Pierre generally can’t begin his days without a coffee and a croissant. Today they were
running late for work so he thought it would be best to skip it.

8. Samantha decided to buy a Tesla car, but they told her she’d had to wait for six months.

9. Pedro’s sister is a professional tennis player. He’s won many tournaments and travel to
many countries.

06_Appendix.indd 199 2/7/19 10:53 AM

10. I always forget to lock the car door when I park it in the garage.

11. Greg really enjoys running in the park early in the morning. He find it peaceful, enjoys the
he’s clean, and often sees fish swam in the pond.

EXERCISE
A·37
1. Are they meant to get here before or after midnight?
2. Karen should have to make sure all of the children are on the bus before it leaves.
3. Lady Gaga and Khaled are planning to release their new video in the next few days.
4. Since her last doctor’s visit, she has been eating less meat.
5. She is going to cancel all of her magazine subscriptions next year.
6. He doesn’t have to finish all of his homework today.
7. Frank is going to buy a scooter next week.
8. It’s the beginning of summer, so Bill is going to get a part-time job.
9. His father has been marinating the fish and the vegetables all day.
10. Sarah’s kale salads and desserts are so delicious; she should be able to open her own
little restaurant.
11. I should have to pay for what I have done, even if it was an accident.
EXERCISE
A·38
1. He was so thrilling to get to see her again.

200 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 200 2/7/19 10:53 AM

2. Tyler is interesting in trying out yoga.

3. She was so proud. At last, her son was pass his driving test.

4. The way we live have to change if we want to reduce global warming.

5. The library is locate inside the main building on campus.

6. The chess club has been managing by students since 1984.

7. We need to respect others and be respect.

8. The decision can be overrule only if there isn’t a majority.

9. They appreciate their neighbors, because they is kind, not too noisy, and well manner.

EXERCISE
A·39
Complete each sentence with an appropriate active- or passive-voice form of the verb in
parentheses.
1. Jenna was meant to speak at the conference this morning, but she
(not + board) on her flight because the airline crew
(already + close) the airplane door. She didn’t make it to the
gate in time.
2. Until tonight, the store (offer) a 50% discount on everything.

If you want to buy your jacket for less, you should try to make it there before it closes.
3. Alex (practice) the drums on his own for a few months. His
technique (definitely + improve) but he still needs help on
his form.
4. I’m sorry I wasn’t there when you came by the house. I had just
(pick up) by Carol.
06_Appendix.indd 201 2/7/19 10:53 AM

5. It was just Laura and I (cry) at the cinema last night, when
the main character (lose) his life in the final scene. I guess
people are embarrassed to cry in public!
6. Before Karen took her final test last week, she (ask) to review
all of her lessons.
EXERCISE
A·40
1. She must play The Beatles. Who else could it have been?

2. He may nap, so do not bother him.

3. They should gone to the supermarket with you.

4. You mayn’t do that.

5. We can have water in order to survive.

6. Paul told me last week that they had not go to the gym last month.

7. They willn’t come till much later.

8. Long should they live!

9. Would Margaret come in?

10. If Shawn and Mary should help, they would.

11. I can run faster when I was younger.

202 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 202 2/7/19 10:53 AM

12. Should they be excused?

13. She cans do it too.

EXERCISE
A·41
Complete each sentence with the appropriate tense of the verb in parentheses.
1. Traffic on our road (be) terrible this week, I hope they finish the
construction soon. It (be + take) us so much longer to get to work in the
mornings.
2. What a manageable winter it’s been so far. It (snow) for a few hours each
day and earlier this week it (freeze) over the course of an afternoon, but it
(not + be) that cold. Today (be) sunny so
(spend) time outside has been pleasant.
3. We (go) to get some groceries yesterday, but we (forget)

to pick up a few tomatoes and some lettuce. (it + be) possible for us to
make a salad with what we have?
4. I (spend) a few hours at the park this afternoon. It’s beautiful. I (not + be)
there before and regret (not + realize) it before today.
5. Jeremy (fall) while riding his bike this past weekend, and he has
(be + rest) since. It was nothing serious, he just (scrape)
his knee. It could (be) worse but thankfully, he (be + wear)
his helmet. He (sleep) when you called, that’s why he didn’t answer his
cellphone.
06_Appendix.indd 203 2/7/19 10:53 AM

EXERCISE
A·42
1. This team formation is not working. The players has to be switch out and replace.

2. Becky are tired from a long day of work but when her husband arriving home they
decided to go out anyways

3. Honestly, I’m not sure if the package will be deliver by next week. Maybe I have chosen a
faster shipping option.

4. they went to play outside even though it was rather cold. Rachel, his mother, was glad
they did because she needed clean up the living room.

5. Our organization is dedicate to saving animals when they are been abandoned. We try
their best to keep them safe and fed until they’re eventually adopt.

6. Carla appreciates the way Paul is helping it with the suitcases. They’re actually not that
heavy, she just enjoy that he are being a gentleman.

7. I can’t believe you forget the keys on the counter and slam the door shut. ah why did you
do that

8. Sophie is feeling so proud. At last, she was receive a raise at work, and next month she was
promoted to a managerial position.

9. Stayed calm is important shouting is not. People tend to are more receptive to kindness.
No one like being screamed at.

204 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 204 2/7/19 10:53 AM

10. Bill is fascinating by the sharks at the aquarium. The way it moving back and forth in the
water tank is hypnotized.

11. They’ve been look for her all over the place. shes here isnt she

12. Frank’s issue can only be resolve once he is taken all of the elements into consideration.

13. I must completing this form before the counter closes in half an hour. give me that pen
right away

14. That restaurant’s apple pie are so amazing. We guarantee you’ll want some more!

15. please stay on the line she said. This was his third time calling customer service and it kept
putting him hold.

EXERCISE
A·43
If it is not, write one or more correct sentences based on the item.
1. To wash this stain. You’ll need a powerful detergent.

2. Shawn is playing over there. With his two cousins and they are having fun.

3. After we wake up in the morning can meet them for breakfast.

4. Once our name is called step up to the window and picks up your order.

06_Appendix.indd 205 2/7/19 10:53 AM

5. Patricia will get a monthly gym membership in addition to the classes she will have access
to the pool. The sauna, their tanning salon, and the Zumba classes.

6. As soon as Peter gets home, don’t forget to hand him the car keys.

7. They are leaving tomorrow it’s the beginning of his summer break.

8. Lucy doesn’t like drawing. Because she claims she has no talent for it.

9. My dream is to live somewhere close to the beach.

10. When I was living in New York. I assumed it has been the greatest city in the world.

11. His favorite cartoon were The Smurfs. Because it reminded him of his childhood.

12. Today Paul and Tina realize that working hard isn’t enough to be happy.

EXERCISE
A·44
1. You will notice many kind of student attending our English classes.

2. There are many way of writing it, but the right way is the best of way.

3. All airplane pilot have to score high points on the two section of the flight simulation.

4. There are two kind of chocolate in this cake: white chocolates and milk chocolates.

5. Eight out of ten engineers has confirmed that the bridge is safe to use.

206 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 206 2/7/19 10:53 AM

6. A couple of magicians in the show startled the audience with its tricks.

7. Science has been key in the evolution of mankind.

8. Mathematics is a confusing class to me; it seems like most students does well on the
quizzes, but I don’t.

9. In my experience, using the dictionary as often as possible give students the opportunity
to learned new words.

10. There are three kind of people in this world: good persons, bad persons, and persons who
don’t care.

11. The DJ was playing four newly released song on the radio this morning.

12. The movies Wes Anderson makes is so fun to watch, he’s a great director. I’m guessing
you’ll really like his work.

13. If Shauna and Coy sleep on their international flight, it might feel less tired the next day.

14. French cuisine are so simple and minimal, yet the flavors is often so rich and complex.

15. Everyone who care about her country should vote.

16. Weigh the flour and the sugar again before you mix it in with the eggs.

17. The three new employees shares the office that is in the corner.

18. She forgot her umbrella and her hat in the taxi. She called the taxi company later that
afternoon; can you believe they found it?!

06_Appendix.indd 207 2/7/19 10:53 AM

19. Most people wish to lives a long and happy life.

20. At first, I didn’t like going to the opera, but now I appreciate them a lot more.

EXERCISE
A·45
If the item contains an error, describe the error, and then write your own correct,
grammatical sentence based on the item.
EXAMPLE Has many cars.
This item contains an error because it is a sentence fragment:

Drake has many cars.
1. The World Cup.

2. Last year, he began to work on his garden.

3. Edmond Dantès he is the hero of the novel The Count of Montecristo.

4. If she wants to feel rested.

5. Close the door on your way out.

6. Helping children to share.

7. Running long distances is difficult.

208 appendix
06_Appendix.indd 208 2/7/19 10:53 AM

8. Have they already fixed all these problems

9. after they were done eating, they cleaned up the kitchen.

10. different fun rides in that loud, crowded amusement park.

11. Not only she kind, she also very generous.

12. Patience takes effort.

13. If you’re not lying, don’t have to be worried.

14. Pay attention!

06_Appendix.indd 209 2/7/19 10:53 AM

Answer key
1 The sentence
1·1 Answers may vary.
1. They were eating an Italian specialty.
2. They have worked in Austin for two years.
3. We purchased it last week.
4. The salad is awful.
5. It looks comfortable.
6. Mrs. Robinson went to the theater.
1·2 1. Children
2. Water
3. Prague
4. The furry, clean, calm cat
5. The furry, clean, calm, black cat
6. The furry, clean, calm, black cat with a scar
7. The big, ugly, dirty, brown bear with long ears and large claws
8. She
9. Peter
10. Lending money and giving too much advice
1·3 1. The big, brown dog sitting in the shade, is
2. I, drink
3. Saul, ordered
4. The youth hostels we stayed in while we were in Budapest, weren’t
5. My professor, was
6. her father, is
7. presidential elections, will be held
8. the people who were sitting in the front row, got up
1. After work 6. In winter, usually
2. strange 7. younger, beautifully
3. never 8. quietly
4. Last week, new black 9. horrible, in the city
5. seriously 10. rather
2 The verb phrase

2·1 1. doesn’t go 7. has been practicing
2. goes 8. has to be
3. is heading out 9. goes
4. washes 10. had visited
5. is going 11. is going to travel
6. has traveled
210
07_Answer key.indd 210 2/7/19 11:03 AM

2·2 1. does 5. has
2. is 6. should
3. is 7. has to
4. has
2·3 1. James is trying on a pair of pants.
James has tried on a pair of pants.
James should try on a pair of pants.
2. I am living on about a hundred dollars a week.
I have lived on about a hundred dollars a week.
I should live on about a hundred dollars a week.
3. Father is scolding the children.
Father has scolded the children.
Father should scold the children.
4. Is she working hard?
Has she worked hard?
Should she work hard?
5. The conductor is waiting on the platform.
The conductor has waited on the platform.
The conductor should wait on the platform.
3 The verb
1. seemed or sounded 5. is or tastes
2. looks 6. sounds
3. appear or seem or look 7. is or feels
4. are
3·2 1. I studied mathematics.
I have studied mathematics.
I had studied mathematics.
I will study mathematics.
I will have studied mathematics.
2. Tom was going to Iraq.
Tom has been going to Iraq.
Tom had been going to Iraq.
Tom will be going to Iraq.
Tom will have been going to Iraq.
3. Anna came along.
Anna has come along.
Anna had come along.
Anna will come along.
Anna will have come along.
4. They were driving to Arizona.
They have been driving to Arizona.
They had been driving to Arizona.
They will be driving to Arizona.
They will have been driving to Arizona.
3·3 1. Why does he run so fast?
2. The boys were swimming across the river.
3. The hungry campers have been eating the hot dogs.
4. I won’t go to work today.
5. The old woman was being very nice to me.
6. My uncle has been singing in a chorus.
7. Will you be driving your dad’s new car?
8. I thought about you.
9. We had been shopping there.
10. We camped on the side of a hill.
Answer key 211

4 The progressive tenses
1. I heard a loud noise
2. the accident took place
3. the electricity suddenly went off
4. the first two guests arrived early
5. The baby was being put to bed
6. I was looking for the light switch
7. I was playing volleyball with my son
8. Their car was speeding down the highway
9. I was sleeping in the hammock
10. I was just window-shopping
4·2 1. While they were opening their Christmas gifts, the Christmas tree fell over.
2. While Tom was swimming in the pool, his little brother fell in the water.
3. While she was speaking with the letter carrier, a taxi pulled up in front of the house.
4. While Ms. Howard was lecturing her class, her cell phone rang.
5. While the boys were playing checkers on the floor, the cat jumped into the middle of their game.
4·3 1. washes 6. turns on, stays on
2. eats, is eating 7. is hailing
3. am trying 8. is not playing
4. am still waiting 9. coaches, trains
5. is shining 10. attends, plays
4·4 1. called, was not, was visiting
2. heard, was
3. was shining, was blowing or blew, were running or ran
4. were joking, entered, stopped, pretended, were doing
5. opened, found
6. was organizing, dusted
7. preferred
8. was telling, fell, closed, walked
9. was running, caught, broke
4·5 1. arrive, will be waiting
2. will be sleeping, will be climbing, will be thinking
3. will be staying
4. is, will be raining
5. will be using
6. will be staying, am
5 The perfect tenses

5·1 1. has given
2. have smoked
3. have known
4. have never seen
5. felt
6. have already annoyed, got
7. has been
8. landed
9. broke
5·2 1. I have never fed
2. I have never read
3. I have never wrecked
4. I have never understood
212 Answer key

5. I have never thought
6. I have never built
7. I have never flown
8. I have never held
9. I have never slept
10. I have never traveled
11. I have never taught
12. I have never voted
13. I have never listened
14. I have never caught
15. I have never made
16. I have never won
17. I have never sent
18. I have never eaten
19. I have never stolen
20. I have never fallen
21. I have never brought
22. I have never forgotten
23. I have never drunk
1. the 17th of February, two days ago, the 15th of February, two days
2. in 1996, 12 years, 1996
3. 8, 2000, eight years, 2000
4. the 12th of March, on the 15th of December, December, almost three months
5·4 1. have made
2. has advanced
3. has changed, were, have become, were
4. has gotten, has also gotten, have become
5. had, went, talked
6. have you learned, began
7. have you met, have already met
8. have never tasted
9. Have you ever met
10. have already taken, failed, took
11. have you gone, have been, have never been, were you, also visited, took, you visited, were, had,
have always wanted, have not had, went, have not traveled
5·5 1. Pedro 6. Paul
2. Mr. Prince 7. Bertrand
3. Tyler 8. Alicia
4. Lucas 9. Kenji’s uncle
5. Lucy
5·6 1. was, had stopped
2. left, had collected, had recorded
3. had already given, got, had also handed out
4. felt, had taken or took, had given or gave
5. had been or was, became
6. locked, walked out, had taken, forgot or had forgotten
7. had been, made, had blocked out
5·7 1. ran, had not seen, recognized, had changed, had lost
2. had already occupied, bought, made
3. had never seen, visited
4. roamed, had become, evolved
5. had already begun, got, sat down, tried
Answer key 213

5·8 1. get, will already have left or will have already left
2. have been, had been, will have been
3. will have been
4. will have suffered, retires
5. will have been running (and) swimming or will have run (and) swum
6. will have taken
7. got, had already arrived
8. have been walking or have walked, had been walking or had walked, will have been walking or
will have walked
9. will have lived
10. will have traveled or will have been traveling
5·9 1. goes, will meet, meets, will have watched
2. has read, is reading, has been reading, intends, has read, has ever read
3. began, has not finished, is reading
4. are taking, fell, have been sleeping or have slept, will sleep
5. had already eaten, left, usually tries, heads out, do not eat, go, get, will try, go, will eat
6. is studying, is also taking, begin
7. went, wanted
8. attends or is attending
9. locked, came, got, was mixing, uses, had been working or had worked
5·10 1. was, has not, need, do not have, do not know, do you need, will pay, takes or has taken
2. is not, called, gets, am sitting or will be sitting, studying
3. sat, began, was sitting, asked, tried, was, did, was talking, sat, felt or had felt, raised, asked
4. was lying or lay, heard, got, looked, opened, had just left, had taken off
5. will take or am taking, am really looking, will go, leave, will go, studies or is studying, has been living,
knows, has promised, am staying or stay, have never been, have always wanted
5·11 1. verb 4. auxiliary verb
2. auxiliary verb 5. verb
3. verb 6. auxiliary verb
6 Modal auxiliaries
6·1 1. may 6. can
2. should or may 7. can
3. might 8. could
4. Should 9. may
5. would 10. should
1. borrow my truck any time
2. like to become a ballerina
3. leave for home before the storm begins
4. have a close look at those worn-out tires
5. train well for the triathlon
6. stop by for a visit tomorrow
7. turn down that radio
8. drink so much
6·3 1. should 9. must
2. must 10. must
3. should 11. must
4. should 12. should
5. must 13. must
6. must 14. should
7. should 15. should
8. should 16. must
6·4 1. a 4. a
2. b 5. b
3. b 6. a
214 Answer key

6·5 1. I shouldn’t have gone to a movie.
2. I should have studied.
3. I shouldn’t have played video games.
4. I should have looked it up in the dictionary.
5. I shouldn’t have left the window open.
6. I shouldn’t have turned off the fan.
7. I shouldn’t have spent all my money while I was on vacation.
8. I should have gone grocery shopping.
9. I shouldn’t have left my coat at home.
10. I shouldn’t have lied to her.
11. I should have had coffee this morning.
12. I shouldn’t have eaten all the ice cream.
6·6 1. do not have to
2. must not
3. does not have to
4. must not
5. must not
6. must not
7. do not have to
8. does not have to
9. do not have to
10. must not
11. does not have to
12. do not have to, must not
13. must not
14. do not have to
15. do not have to
6·7 1. You are to keep off the grass.
2. You are not to eat or drink inside.
3. You are to move to the rear of the plane.
4. You are not to feed the monkeys.
5. You are not to smoke.
6. You are not to allow visitors on board.
7. You are not to litter.
8. You are not to use the elevator in case of fire.
6·8 1. Can 5. Can
2. May 6. Will
3. Will 7. shall
4. Shall
6·9 1. a 5. a
2. b 6. b
3. a 7. b
4. a
7 The progressive forms of modal auxiliaries

7·1 1. must have been kidding
2. must be playing
3. should be studying
4. may be staying, might be staying
5. may have been kidding
6. must be raining
7. may be jogging
8. must be burning
9. could be riding, may be walking
10. must have been climbing
Answer key 215

7·2 1. is 7. are
2. X 8. X
3. X 9. were
4. X, are 10. am
5. am 11. is
6. X 12. is, am
7·3 1. used to be, would open
2. used to be
3. would ask, would never let
4. would begin
5. used to be, would get together, would go, used to drink
6. used to be, would make up, would not help
7. used to be, would start, would have
8. would take
9. would walk
10. would swim, would dry out, would get ready, would hike
11. used to live, would always smile, would say, would clear
8 The auxiliary verb do

8·1 1. Do they come here?, Where do they come?
2. Did she stay there?, Where did she stay?
3. Did his airplane land in the morning?, Where did his airplane land in the morning?
4. Did the package arrive?, Where did the package arrive?
5. Does Robert live there?, Where does Robert live?
8·2 1. I do not own any black-and-white movies.
2. I do not have any problems with my computer.
3. We do not have any time to waste.
4. I did not see anyone I know (or knew).
5. I do not need any help with my homework.
6. I do not trust any of you.
7. I do not trust anyone.
8·3 1. Do the girls need some help?, Don’t the girls need some help?
2. Does she have a job in a bakery?, Doesn’t she have a job in a bakery?
3. Did Bob see somebody in the shadows?, Didn’t Bob see somebody in the shadows?
4. Do you like hot tea?, Don’t you like hot tea?
8·4 1. verb 4. auxiliary verb
2. auxiliary verb 5. verb
3. verb 6. auxiliary verb
9 The passive voice

9·1 1. P 6. A
2. P 7. P
3. P 8. P
4. A 9. A
5. A
9·2 1. A hundred dollars was found by Maria.
2. The Preamble to the Constitution will be memorized by the students.
3. Were the tickets purchased by you?
4. Some ancient ruins have been discovered by them.
5. The room is being measured by Bill.
216 Answer key

9·3 1. A thousand cars were manufactured at that plant.
2. Theories about that are being developed.
3. That painting will be bought today.
4. The opening of the new store has been postponed.
5. His work is not respected.
9·4 1. A new design for the logo has been suggested by Kevin.
2. The formula is going to be explained by the professor.
3. People at the bar are served by bartenders.
4. A speech is being prepared by Noam Chomsky.
5. Marie will be invited to the party by Alex.
6. The novel American Gods was written by Neil Gaiman.
9·5 1. will have been 5. is going to be
2. is 6. will be
3. is being 7. had been
4. has been
9·6 1. Every professional school in New York teaches technical skills.
2. TF1 is broadcasting the ping-pong tournament.
3. X
4. Keats wrote this poem. García Lorca wrote the other one.
5. X, Later, Arabs produced paper in Baghdad.
6. X
7. X
9·7 1. My purse was stolen by someone.
2. X
3. My fork was borrowed by Gabriel at lunch.
4. This antique sewing machine was made in 1834 by someone.
5. X
6. The plants were being watered by Steve when I walked into the garden this morning.
7. The president is going to be judged by the jury on the basis of his testimony.
8. When was the atomic bomb invented by America?
9. X
10. Is a reunion being organized by Maureen this week?
11. The Bible has been translated into many languages by professionals.
10 The passive form of modal auxiliaries

10·1 1. should be told
2. should have been driven
3. should clean or should have cleaned
4. must be kept
5. couldn’t be convinced
6. couldn’t open
7. may be offered
8. may not offer
9. may have already been offered
10. may have already hired
11. must have been surprised
12. should have been sent
13. should be sent
14. had better clean
15. had better be cleaned
16. has to return or will have to return
17. have to be returned or will have to be returned or had to be returned
18. ought to be divided
19. ought to have been divided
Answer key 217

1. may be
2. can be seen
3. must be put
4. should not get
5. should not be encouraged
6. ought to be postponed
7. might be misunderstood
8. can’t be explained
9. must be married
10. must have been left
11. will be displeased
12. has to be pushed
13. should be built
14. ought to be saved
15. has to be done
16. should be elected
11 The stative passive

11·1 1. disappointed 5. confusing
2. exciting 6. confused
3. interested 7. excited
4. gratifying 8. excited
11·2 1. is broken
2. is closed
3. was closed
4. is made
5. is shut
6. are bent, are folded
7. is finished
8. are turned
9. is not crowded
10. is hidden
11. is torn
12. are gone
13. is set, are finished, are lit
14. is made, is vacuumed, are washed
15. was stuck
16. is stuck
11·3 1. scheduled 10. is gone
2. is, crowded 11. are, qualified
3. am lost 12. am married
4. am exhausted 13. is spoiled
5. am confused 14. is blocked
6. is turned off 15. is located
7. is insured 16. Is, plugged in
8. is stuck 17. is, done
9. are divorced
11·4 1. is composed of
2. is interested in
3. is accustomed to
4. is scared of
5. am satisfied with

218 Answer key

6. are covered with
7. are opposed to
8. is finished with
9. is married to
10. am, acquainted with
11. is tired of
12. Are, related to
13. is dedicated to
14. are disappointed with
15. am scared of
16. is dedicated to
17. are devoted to
18. is dressed in
12 Past participles with get

1. No one is getting hired, because the company will go out of business.
2. Larry was getting annoyed, because the dog would not stop barking.
3. His pay is getting increased, because he did a great job on the project.
4. Younger candidates are getting elected, because the people want change.
5. He was getting fingerprinted when the police found the real culprit.
12·2 1. am getting tired
2. are, getting married
3. get dressed
4. got lost
5. got hurt
6. got tired
7. get accustomed
8. am getting worried
9. got confused
10. get upset
11. get done
12. get bored
13. got depressed
14. get packed
15. get paid
16. got hired, got fired
17. didn’t get finished
18. got engaged, got married, got divorced
13 Participial adjectives
13·1 1. sleeping, slept
2. inventing, invented
3. losing, lost
4. destroying, destroyed
5. comparing, compared
6. reporting, reported
7. endangering, endangered
8. making, made
9. stealing, stolen
10. slaying, slain
Answer key 219

1. It is an entertained group of children.
2. He/She is an entertaining circus clown.
3. This is a boring class.
4. They are bored students.
5. This is a frightening accident.
6. She is a frightened woman.
7. She was a surprised girl.
8. It was a loud and surprising noise.
9. It was hard and exhausting work.
10. They were exhausted men.
13·3 1. borrowed 8. damaged
2. terrified 9. crowded
3. terrifying 10. frozen
4. gratifying 11. injured
5. stolen 12. lasting
6. embarrassing 13. locked
7. damaging 14. deserted
14 Subject-verb agreement
14·1 1. are 6. like
2. writes 7. were
3. were 8. Do
4. are 9. were
5. wakes 10. is
14·2 1. were running
2. doesn’t work
3. has
4. are
5. is screaming or was screaming
14·3 1. am 9. were
2. are 10. were
3. are 11. were
4. are 12. was
5. is 13. was
6. is 14. was
7. is 15. was
8. was
14·4 1. is 12. are
2. has 13. is
3. is 14. is
4. are 15. Do
5. are 16. Do
6. belongs 17. were
7. are 18. was
8. are 19. Do
9. is 20. is
10. is 21. is
11. is or are, are
14·5 1. are 6. aren’t
2. is 7. are
3. are 8. isn’t
4. isn’t 9. is
5. is 10. are
220 Answer key

14·6 1. is 9. do
2. is 10. are
3. is 11. like
4. is 12. is
5. tries 13. fear
6. is 14. are
7. is 15. depends
8. is 16. have
14·7 1. Are 13. is
2. are 14. is
3. are 15. provides
4. is 16. violates
5. Do 17. is
6. Does 18. plan
7. is 19. is
8. is 20. is
9. makes 21. are
10. keeps 22. are
11. are 23. is
12. knocks 24. is
14·8 1. Mark and Pamela
2. Manhattan
3. People
4. cars
14·9 1. was
2. is
3. talk
4. are
5. were
15 Agreement with nouns

15·1 1. They were 7. They
2. they 8. It
3. It doesn’t 9. It consists
4. they 10. they
5. it is 11. They are
6. them, they appreciate 12. It is
1. a few dishes
2. many airplanes
3. several animals
4. some students/coffee
5. a little argument/cotton
6. six meters
7. much courage
8. little kittens/rain
15·3 1. is
2. is
3. is
4. stays
5. was
15·4 1. much 6. loaves
2. much 7. a little
3. some 8. the few
4. is 9. much
5. much 10. a little
Answer key 221

15·5 1. was 4. wants
2. was 5. is
3. studies 6. drinks
15·6 1. he or she wants
2. they are
3. he or she builds, his or her
4. He, he or She, she
5. he
6. his or her or their
7. his or her or their
8. he, his or she, her or they, their
9. it is
10. It is, It, it, his
1. are 5. any
2. is 6. was
3. are 7. many
4. are
16 Using other
1. another difficult task
2. another day at the office
3. another way of looking at things
4. another bowl of soup
5. other relatives of the bride
6. other kinds of problems
7. other goals of the project
8. other people to greet
16·2 1. the other
2. Others
3. another
4. others
5. The other
6. the other
7. Another, Another, Another, the other
8. Another, The other
9. the other
10. other
11. others
12. each other, one another, each other (or any combination)
13. another
14. another
15. the other
16. the other
17. others, other people, others (or any combination)
18. the others
19. other
20. another, Another, The other
21. Another, others
22. Another, The other
23. the others
24. another
25. each other or one another
26. another
27. another
222 Answer key

17 Gerunds
1. drawing, practicing, sleeping late, juggling
2. hunting, kayaking, skiing, weightlifting
17·2 1. Moving
2. Mentioning
3. meeting
4. Managing
5. walking, swimming
17·3 1. reaching 6. singing
2. Deciding 7. alerting
3. protecting, serving 8. Listening
4. studying, staying 9. Stretching
5. painting, repairing 10. Rhyming, dancing
18 Conjunctions
18·1 Sample answers are provided.
1. red, The car was small, dirty, and red.
2. muddy, The country lane was narrow, long, and muddy.
3. pollution, I dislike living downtown because of the noise, crime, and pollution.
4. kind people, The Dominican Republic has kind people, palm trees, pretty beaches, and tropical birds.
5. foods, I like to become acquainted with people, customs, and foods from other countries.
18·2 1. Susan washed the dishes and put the food away.
2. Peter opened the door and greeted the guests.
3. Ralph is painting the garage door and cleaning the brushes.
4. Simon is generous, handsome, and intelligent.
5. Please try to make less noise and have some respect for others.
6. She gave him chocolates on Monday, a CD on Tuesday, and a bracelet on Wednesday.
7. While we were in Los Angeles, we went to a concert, ate Mexican food, and visited old friends.
8. I should have finished my project and cleaned my car.
9. He preferred to play poker or spend time in museums.
10. I like water, but not soda.
18·3 1. and 5. but
2. so 6. nor
3. but 7. and
4. or 8. and
18·4 1. are 4. is
2. is 5. is
3. are 6. are
18·5 1. She has neither a pen nor a ruler.
2. Both the giant panda and the white tiger face extinction.
3. We could either drive or take the bus.
4. She wants to buy either a Honda or a Toyota.
5. We can either fix dinner for them at home or take them to the restaurant.
6. Not only Joseph but also Peter is absent. or Both Joseph and Peter are absent.
7. Neither Joe nor Pedro is in class today.
8. You can have either tea or coffee.
9. Both Roger and Sam enjoy playing Nintendo.
10. The President’s press secretary will neither confirm nor deny the story.
11. Both coal and petroleum are nonrenewable natural resources.
12. Both bird flu and malaria are dangerous diseases.
13. Neither her parents nor her boyfriend knows where she is.
14. According to the weather report, not only will it rain tomorrow but it will also be windy.
Answer key 223

18·6 1. whether, or, for, and
2. and, either, or
3. not only, but, and
4. Neither, nor, but
5. Both, and, but
18·7 1. The men walked. The boys ran.
2. Sylvia came to the meeting. Her brother stayed home.
3. Sylvia came to the meeting, but her brother stayed home.
4. X
5. The professor spoke. The students listened.
6. His academic record was outstanding, yet he was not accepted into Harvard.
7. Her academic record was outstanding. She was not accepted into Harvard, but she was not too unhappy
about it.
8. X
9. We had to go to the grocery store, for there was nothing to eat in the fridge.
10. A barometer measures air pressure. A thermometer measures temperature.
11. The Egyptians had good sculptors. Archeologists have found marvelous statues buried in the pyramids.
12. Murdock made many promises, but he had no intention of keeping them. He was known to be a liar.
13. I always enjoyed studying geography in high school, so I decided to pursue it in college.
14. Cecilia is in serious legal trouble, for she had no car insurance at the time of the accident.
15. Last night, Marie had to study for an exam, so she went to a coffeehouse.
16. The team of scientists has not finished analyzing the virus yet. Their work will not be published until later
this year.
17. You have nothing to fear, for they are strong and united.
18. She threw the book out the window. She had failed the exam again, so she’d ruined her chances of bringing
up her grade in the class.
19. Sophia struggled to keep her head above water. She tried to yell, but the water kept getting in her mouth.
20. The hurricane was devastating. Tall buildings crumbled and crashed to the ground.
21. It was a wonderful day at the park. The children swam in the river, collected rocks and insects, and
laughed all day. The older kids played soccer. The adults prepared the food, supervised the children, and
played cards for a short while.
22. Caterpillars eat plants and can cause damage to some crops, but adult butterflies feed primarily on flowers
and do not cause any harm.
23. Both Jesse and I had many errands to do this morning. Jesse had to go to the post office and the bookstore.
I had to go to the pharmacy, the video store, and the bank.
24. The butterfly is extraordinary. It begins as an ugly caterpillar and turns into something colorful. It almost
looks like a piece of art.
18·8 1. although
2. before
3. until
4. because
5. before
6. while
7. since
8. even though
9. until
10. since or because
11. because
12. when or whenever
13. before or when
14. if
15. than
16. after or as soon as or when
17. even though or although
18. unless
224 Answer key

18·9 Sample answers are provided.
1. They can’t leave until they feed the cats.
2. I am not going to leave this room until you tell me the truth. or Until you tell me the truth, I am not
going to leave this room.
3. He can’t pay his parking ticket until he receives his paycheck.
4. It had been a boring conversation until, finally, Steve arrived. or Until Steve finally arrived, it had been
a boring conversation.
5. When I go to bed at night, I like to read until I get sleepy.
18·10 I n these answers, the dependent clause beginning with Now that precedes the independent clause; however,
it could also follow the independent clause.
1. Now that Patrick moved into a house, he can use his own furniture.
2. Now that I’ve finally finished painting the kitchen, I can go running.
3. Now that it’s winter, they have to wear warm clothes.
4. Now that he’s 21, he can legally drink.
5. Now that Charles has a Jeep, he can drive to school.
6. Now that the civil war has ended, a new government is being formed.
7. Now that the project is finally over, we can relax.
8. Now that the water has gotten warmer, do you want to go swimming?
9. Now that my best friend is married, he has more responsibilities.
10. Now that I know English, I can get a job as a translator.
1. We stopped to visit our grandparents on our way to Oklahoma; afterwards/later/then, we stayed with
friends in Tulsa.
2. We had planned to go to the park today; however/unfortunately, the rain canceled our plans.
3. It was a difficult time for her; still/however/nonetheless, she learned a lot from the experience.
4. The hotel stayed vacant and abandoned for many years; finally/eventually, the city council decided
to tear it down.
5. They had a romantic walk along the river; afterwards/later, they went back to the hotel to drink some
champagne.
6. Mr. Williams cannot speak at the conference; instead/therefore, Mr. Rogers will go in his place.
7. We enjoy all kinds of outdoor activities; for example, we really like rock climbing.
8. The mall is already closed; besides/anyway, you do not have any money to spend.
9. The essay must be written by Monday; otherwise, you fall behind schedule.
10. Anna Nicole Smith was incredibly rich; however, she did not have a happy life.
11. They spent their entire afternoon shopping for clothes; afterwards/later, they wore some of their
purchases to the dance.
12. He likes seafood; however, he is allergic to oysters.
19 Prepositions
19·1 1. instead of, truck
2. in, pool; for, dinner
3. above, hills
4. about, book
5. into, room; next to, Helen
6. of, one
7. from, him; in, Iraq
8. Contrary to, opinion
9. among, students; from, department
10. with, table; by, window
Answer key 225

1. her lovely garden
2. their sister
3. a chocolate éclair and a banana split
4. noon, sundown
5. the old monastery
6. the threat of a storm
7. your poor showing on the exam
8. the visitors to the museum
9. origami
10. the electrical storm
19·3 1. We spent a lot of time there.
2. They have been there for over three years.
3. In it, I found my sister’s diary.
4. City Hall has been located here for years.
5. What are you hiding in them?
6. Do you really like its smell?
7. Their gowns looked like flour sacks.
8. His or Her symphony was recently found.
9. They said her poems are their favorites.
10. Its political goals are slowly changing.
1. next to a school for the blind
2. beneath the first floor of a hotel
3. on the outskirts of Paris
4. of the state of Indiana
5. in the closet of his bedroom
20 Adjectives and adverbs

20·1 1. We had never arranged a surprise party for them.
We had rarely arranged a surprise party for them.
2. The soprano from France never sang at the Met.
The soprano from France rarely sang at the Met.
3. Grandfather was never in a good mood.
Grandfather was rarely in a good mood.
4. My brother could never fix his own car.
My brother could rarely fix his own car.
5. They will never go to Alaska in the winter.
They will rarely go to Alaska in the winter.
20·2 1. hard 10. finally
2. best 11. often
3. beautiful, happy 12. biweekly
4. fast, good 13. seriously
5. humid 14. indoors
6. beaming, radiant 15. regularly
7. hurriedly 16. still
8. rarely 17. perhaps
9. loudly
20·3 1. meticulous, meticulously
2. easy, easily
3. loudly, loud
4. quietly
5. secretly
6. well, good
226 Answer key

20·4 1. clean (adj), quite (adv), rapidly (adv)
2. Moroccan (adj), beautiful (adj)
3. old (adj), very (adv), carefully (adv)
4. usually (adv), rather (adv), short (adj)
5. very (adv), good (adj), yesterday (adv)
1. Catherine has already finished writing the essay due tomorrow.
2. Helen is seldom at Jason’s house.
3. Does he always go to her house?
4. He often goes hiking to get away from it all and relax.
5. She should always tell him the truth.
6. Eric has never seen the ocean.
7. Steven often produces his electronic music on his laptop.
8. Anna is often at the club on Tuesday nights.
9. Vince rarely goes to the movies, because he prefers staying home.
10. I generally don’t ask for a girl’s number if I don’t know her.
11. I have never eaten an Asian pear.
21 Filler subjects and impersonal subjects

21·1 1. There was a cat sleeping under the coffee table.
2. There were several girls learning to dance ballet.
3. There will be a class photo taken at ten sharp.
4. There had been a lot of damage caused by the storm.
5. There are promises to be kept.
Answers may vary.
6. a violent storm last night
7. a meeting here recently
8. an important announcement in an hour
9. too many mistakes made
10. significant errors in your work
21·2 1. They 6. he
2. they, they 7. we or they
3. it 8. it
4. it 9. it
5. there 10. it, it
21·3 there, there, it, it, it, There, it
21·4 1. PP
2. IP
3. PP
4. IP
5. IP, IP
22 Clauses
22·1 1. she will be able to eat some dessert
2. Marco picked up something from the office
3. William read the cover story of The Economist
4. Barbara laughed
5. Paul watched
6. many people enjoy drinking a lot of it
Answer key 227

22·2 1. The student that sits next to me is from Korea. or The student, who sits next to me, is from Korea.
2. The boy that won first prize is excited. or The boy, who won first prize, is excited.
3. I smelled the cake that was cooling on the window ledge. or I smelled the cake, which was cooling
on the window ledge.
4. We are studying English, which involves learning many rules.
5. We are studying sentences that contain different clauses.
6. I am using a relative clause that includes a possessive pronoun.
7. Physics problems require long calculations that are often very complex. or Physics problems require
long calculations, which are often very complex.
8. The bus driver that spoke to me a lot was friendly. or The bus driver, who spoke to me a lot, was
friendly.
9. I liked that girl that I met at the zoo last week. or I liked that girl, whom I met at the zoo last week.
10. The movie that I saw was awful.
11. I liked the poem that he wrote.
12. His grandparents, whom we visited last month, were very nice.
22·3 1. I must thank your brother, from whom I received flowers. I must thank your brother, whom I received
flowers from.
2. The woman with whom I spoke this morning was very kind. The woman that I spoke with this morning
was very kind. The woman I spoke with this morning was very kind.
3. The conference that I registered for was interesting. The conference I registered for was interesting.
4. The painting, which I was looking at for a long time, was colorful and detailed. The painting that I was
looking at for a long time was colorful and detailed. The painting I was looking at for a long time was
colorful and detailed.
5. The man whom I was telling you about is sleeping over there. The man that I was telling you about
is sleeping over there. The man I was telling you about is sleeping over there.
22·4 1. Mr. Castro, whose native language is Spanish, teaches a class for foreign students.
2. The yoga instructor whose class I am taking is excellent.
3. I met the man whose son is my office manager.
4. The woman whose apartment was on fire called 911.
5. I laughed at the man that I pushed in the pool.
6. I come from France, whose history goes back hundreds of years.
7. The people whose house we visited were crazy.
8. I sleep in a hotel whose residents are very noisy.
9. I have to call the girl whose cell phone I accidentally picked up after our date.
10. The boy, whose cheeks got sunburned while he was lying at the swimming pool, put lotion all over
his face.
22·5 1. who put out the fire
2. I was waiting for
3. that she is wearing
4. Peter is working on
5. whose advice I take most seriously
6. I had last week
7. I was talking to
8. that destroyed the embassy
22·6 1. The younger men, whom we met in the hotel lobby this morning, are from Peru. The younger men
that we met in the hotel lobby this morning are from Peru. The younger men we met in the hotel lobby
this morning are from Peru.
2. I explained my absence to the manager, whose presentation I had missed. I explained my absence
to the manager whose presentation I had missed.
3. Yesterday, I ran into Paul, whom I hadn’t seen in months.
4. The driver, who was not paying attention, missed the red light.
5. He spoke of the postmodern movement, which I know nothing about. He spoke of the postmodern
movement, about which I know nothing.
6. The historian, whom we met in Paris, is well known for his research. The historian that we met in Paris
is well known for his research. The historian we met in Paris is well known for his research.
7. I am reading a novel that was written by Alexander Dumas.
228 Answer key

8. The teacher, whom I questioned, gave good explanations. The teacher that I questioned gave good
explanations. The teacher I questioned gave good explanations.
9. The professor, whose class I passed, gives easy exams.
10. I returned the car, which I had borrowed from my father. I returned the car that I had borrowed from
my father. I returned the car I had borrowed from my father.
11. The hunter caught the lion, which had killed someone from the village. The hunter caught the lion that
had killed someone from the village.
12. The children, whom I am taking care of, are very quiet. The children that I am taking care of are very
quiet. The children I am taking care of are very quiet.
22·7 1. That is the cafeteria where I will eat lunch. or That is the cafeteria that I will eat lunch in.
or That is the cafeteria I will eat lunch in.
2. The medieval village, where we spent our summer, was beautiful. or The medieval village where we
spent our summer was beautiful. or The medieval village, in which we spent our summer, was beautiful.
or The medieval village, which we spent our summer in, was beautiful. or The medieval village that we
spent our summer in was beautiful. or The medieval village we spent our summer in was beautiful.
3. The neighborhood where I grew up is dangerous. or The neighborhood that I grew up in is dangerous.
or The neighborhood I grew up in is dangerous.
4. That is the account where I kept all my savings. or That is the account that I kept all my savings in.
or That is the account I kept all my savings in.
5. Carl is from Jamaica, where I used to live.
1. 1:10 p.m. is the time when my train arrives at the station.
2. June is the month when I will come.
3. 1959 is the year when the Cuban socialist revolution took place.
4. Wednesday is the day when my plane arrives.
22·9 1. That is the sidewalk where I parked.
2. That is the city where I was born.
3. That is the store where you do your grocery shopping.
4. That is the bank where you keep your money.
5. That is the building where he works.
6. That is the street where she lives.
7. That is the Mexican restaurant where we ate lunch.
8. That is the amphitheater where we have class.
9. That is the hotel where we spent our vacation.
10. That is the river where you went fishing.
11. That is the town where I lived until I was ten years old.
12. That is the university where your father went to graduate school.
22·10 1. Yes, the movie I watched was scary.
2. No, the iced coffee I drank did not taste good.
3. Yes, the scarf I bought keeps my neck warm.
4. No, the Chinese noodles I had for dinner were not too spicy.
5. Yes, the man I talked to answered my questions.
6. No, the little girl I saw was not wearing a pink sweater.
7. Yes, the football game I went to was exciting.
8. No, the bed-and-breakfast I stayed at was not in the countryside.
9. No, the exercise I am finishing is not difficult.
10. No, the letter I got in the mail was not from my aunt.
22·11 1. Neil Young is the musician whose album you are listening to.
2. Aline Helg is the professor whose class I am writing a thesis for.
3. Mr. Mohammed is the student whose notes I found.
4. Paul is an intern whose pen I borrowed.
5. The child whose ball you lost began to scream.
6. Your neighbors, whose house you stayed at, are very funny.
7. The executive, whose office is locked, has been in a meeting for five hours.
8. The woman whose necklace was stolen called a private detective.
9. Basquiat is the artist whose paintings you like the best.
10. Everyone tried to help the mother whose car had broken down.
Answer key 229

1. that he meets for the first time
2. who has the same birthday I do
3. who knows the answer
4. that I can do for her
5. that we can turn to
6. that he says is true
7. who hasn’t sat down yet
8. that we took yesterday
9. who arrived late
10. who were in the first half, who were in the second half
22·13 1. Last night, the Metropolitan Movie Theater showed three of Stanley Kubrick’s movies, one of which
was Dr. Strangelove.
2. The village has three schools, two of which are high schools.
3. I tried on three hats, one of which I liked.
4. The capital has about five million people, the majority of whom are poor.
5. The army currently employs thousands of young men, all of whom have obtained their GED.
6. After the riots in Paris, over 400 people were arrested, many of whom were peaceful protesters.
7. They spread rumors about Catherine, one of whose faults was being beautiful beyond belief.
1. which is really old
2. whom I had met last semester in Spanish class
3. whom live in Toulouse, France
4. which lasts only 35 minutes
5. whom I get along with
6. whose main problems is being disorganized
7. which were way too boring
8. which are being repainted
22·15 1. They bought an original Matisse painting, the value of which cannot possibly be estimated.
2. I bought a newspaper, the name of which is Le Monde.
3. We visited a Victorian castle, the interior of which was made of wood.
4. The United Nations is going through many changes, the outcome of which might alter human history.
5. My store’s income is dependent on souvenirs, the sale of which depends on the number of tourists.
22·16 1. Clara was expelled from school, which took her family by surprise.
2. My husband never washes the dishes, which annoys me.
3. Pedro isn’t home yet, which concerns me.
4. There was a fire in Key West, which means many villas burned.
5. I shut the car door on my finger, which was really silly of me.
1. The person sitting behind us kept talking. The person sitting behind us kept talking, which distracted
me a lot.
2. Alfred failed his math test. Alfred failed his math test, which shocked us all.
3. We got a call from the airport. We got a call from the airport, which means she’ll be home anytime.
4. The food was freshly cooked. The food was freshly cooked, which I enjoyed very much.
5. They decided to sign the peace treaty. They decided to sign the peace treaty, which was unexpected
good news.
6. The flight attendants kept snickering. The flight attendants kept snickering, which bothered me.
7. The neighbors’ dog kept barking. The neighbors’ dog kept barking, which annoyed me so much that
I could not fall asleep.
8. My cousin was playing electric guitar. My cousin was playing electric guitar, which was so loud that
it gave me a headache.
22·18 1. What she was mad about was important.
2. I don’t know how well read she is.
3. Please tell me where you go shoe shopping.
4. I have no idea how old that child is.
5. Do you know whose pencil this is?
6. I don’t know who those men are.
230 Answer key

7. I can’t tell who is coming to the meeting.
8. Let’s ask her which flavor of ice cream she wants.
9. I can’t recall how expensive it is.
10. I forgot what it is he sent me. or I forgot what he sent me.
11. What she said to you is a lie!
12. Why she left the state is a mystery.
13. What we are doing at work is top secret.
14. What we are doing in English class today is easy.
15. Whom she is dating is none of your business.
16. I don’t know who the president of Enron is.
17. I need to look up how old someone has to be in order to drink.
22·19 1. Why was George late for registration?
2. How long is it from San Antonio to the Mexican border?
3. What did Sarah sell?
4. Where does Pedro reside?
5. Who is that woman?
6. Whose computer is that?
7. Whom did Joseph see at the dinner?
8. Which movie does Sophie like best?
9. Who noticed Barbara at the bar?
10. When is the train scheduled to arrive?
22·20 1. why George was late for registration
2. how long it is from San Antonio to the Mexican border
3. what Sarah sold
4. where Pedro resides
5. who that woman is
6. whose computer that is
7. (the person) whom Joseph saw at the dinner
8. which movie Sophie likes best
9. who noticed Barbara at the bar
10. when the train is scheduled to arrive
1. I wonder where Adrian is.
2. I wonder who took the television remote.
3. I wonder whether you should call her.
4. I wonder whether Marie needs any help or not.
5. I wonder whether or not you left your keys on the counter.
6. I wonder who that man is.
7. I wonder what they are doing.
8. I wonder whether she is in trouble.
9. I wonder whether we should offer to help him.
10. I wonder whether we have enough time to go on vacation.
11. I wonder whose bike this is.
12. I wonder why the grass is so green.
13. I wonder how long a bonsai lives.
14. I wonder if there is life on Mars.
15. I wonder how the earth was created.
22·22 1. It is unfair that some immigrants don’t receive equal pay for equal work. That some immigrants don’t
receive equal pay for equal work is unfair.
2. It is too bad that Patricia has not been able to make it to second grade. That Patricia has not been able
to make it to second grade is too bad.
3. It is a well-known fact that alcohol abuse can ruin one’s life. That alcohol abuse can ruin one’s life
is a well-known fact.
4. It is a fact that the sun is a star. That the sun is a star is a fact.
5. It is true that smoking can cause lung cancer. That smoking can cause lung cancer is true.
6. It is strange that Marc has made no friends here. That Marc has made no friends here is strange.
7. It is obvious that English is the principal language of the international business community. That English
is the principal language of the international business community is obvious.
Answer key 231

1. to do
2. to wear
3. to move downtown or not
4. to play soccer
5. to get them
6. to eat, to visit certain exhibitions
7. to make lasagna, (to) make a Romano salad
22·24 1. Please let me know where to meet up with you.
2. The fireman told me how to stop a fire from spreading.
3. She told me when to get there.
4. Elizabeth liked both puppies, but she had trouble deciding which one to take home.
5. Alex played in a rock band that was successful, but Nathalie didn’t know whether to buy their new
album or not.
1. take off his hat
2. forget about the whole case
3. be more honest with him
4. sing something for them
5. be as polite as possible from now on
23 Punctuation
23·1 1. The city council requested that Gov. Madison allocate more funds to the development of children’s
playgrounds.
2. Richard told his parents, “I enjoy having dinner before eight o’clock, because it gives me enough time
to finish my homework before going to sleep.”
3. Meet them at Whole Foods for breakfast.
4. Nathan said to his professor, “I can’t be done with my paper by Monday.”
5. I thanked Mrs. Bronco for giving us a ride to school this morning.
6. Sgt. Pepper was called to the conference room for an important membership meeting.
23·2 1. The comma is used to separate the dependent clause from the main clause.
2. Commas are used to separate the elements of the address and to separate the date from the year.
3. The comma is used to separate the two independent clauses.
4. The comma is used to separate large numbers into smaller groups of digits.
5. The comma is used to separate the interrupting words as promised from the rest of the sentence.
6. The comma is used to separate the persons addressed from the rest of the sentence.
7. The comma is used to separate items in a series.
23·3 1. Taylor asked, “How are we supposed to cook this with no oven?”
2. She packed two blouses, a black skirt, and a new business suit.
3. According to the U.S. Census Bureau, the world population reached 6,500,000,000 on February 25, 2006.
4. Dear Mrs. Dimple,
5. The Persian Gulf War officially ended on February 28, 1991.
6. They were so excited by the soccer game, which went into three overtimes, that they hardly noticed
the afternoon go by.
7. Marie, Catherine, and Chris are all going to the theater together.
8. IBM, not Apple, will build a fast computer.
9. If you’ve never been to the craft show, there will be selected sales and bargain bins.
10. She will be participating, won’t she?
11. Yes, I think there is enough time for you to pick it up and get back home before dinner.
12. If I could get a nickel for every time he lies, I would be a billionaire.
13. He had intended to stay home, but he decided instead to go running.
232 Answer key

23·4 1. The computers at my job have large monitors, loud speakers, CD burners, DVD players, and all sorts
of other useful hardware; are equipped with the most recent software; and have the most sophisticated
firewall.
2. Peter was amazed by the talent of the opposing team’s poetry skills; at the same time, he knew his team
could win the poetry contest.
3. Greg was the first to run out of the burning house; however, Elizabeth was the one who made it to
a pay phone to call the fire department.
4. Each of us had enough time to get in the hotel’s swimming pool; nevertheless, we were all there on
business.
5. There are moments when one needs to think about a situation calmly and for a long time; likewise,
there are moments when one needs to make decisions quickly and instinctively.
6. Gina said, “Let’s work as a group”; Peter said, “We should work individually instead”; and Andrew said,
“Let’s split the team, and while some can work as a group, others can work individually.”
7. Karen has been painting the kitchen for three hours; all the while, she has been cooking and playing
with the dogs.
23·5 1. She told me what her favorite colors were: blue, red, and light olive green.
2. Dear Madam President:
3. It is 5:30 a.m.; why are you calling me so early?
4. There are three main ingredients in a cake: sugar, flour, and eggs.
5. It was time for the lawyer to make his closing statement: “My client is an honest man, a hardworking
man, a good husband, and he should not be sitting in this court today.”
6. Nixon said: “Looting and pillaging have nothing to do with civil rights. Starting riots to protest unfair
treatment by the state is not the best of solutions.”
7. John has five trophies on his bookshelf: Four of them are from basketball tournaments.
8. The professor made an interesting statement during class: “We have not yet addressed the topic of social
revolutions, which is a key component of our present argument.”
23·6 1. Are you serious?
2. Get out of here now!
3. What do you think of the president’s decision to go to war? his views on foreign policy? his thoughts
on the economy?
4. Quickly! What are you waiting for?
5. Are you in a hurry?
6. When were you going to tell me?
7. Super!
8. That’s so cool!
9. Do you think the corporation will apologize for unjustly firing those employees? taking away their
retirement? not providing them with a severance package?
10. Are you out of your mind!
23·7 1. The sentence refers to each person’s painting methods, so ’s is added to each name.
2. Cassettes is plural, not possessive, so it has no apostrophe.
3. It’s has an apostrophe, because it is the contraction of it is. Its walk has no apostrophe, because its is
possessive, referring to the dog’s walk.
4. The 1990s is plural, not possessive, so it has no apostrophe.
5. The Doors is plural and possessive, so it has an apostrophe.
6. Because the two individuals own the car as a couple, ’s is added to the second person’s name only.
23·8 1. The sergeant’s boots were always the shiniest of all.
2. She really likes that about the ’80s.
3. A doctor’s quick intervention can save a life.
4. There are times when the UN’s presence has prevented armed conflict.
5. Who’s winning today?
6. X
7. X
8. Natalie’s new bicycle is red and yellow.
9. The Cutlips’ cat wandered into our garage this morning.
10. Her mother’s and father’s wills were drafted by the lawyer.
Answer key 233

23·9 1. I met a woman who said she could make “magic potions.”
2. From what I hear, Joseph said the turning point in the novel is when Carlito tells his cousin, “You should
have never worked with Francisco in the first place; he’s not to be trusted.”
3. She read “The Palm-Tree” and was very moved by the poem.
4. What do you think of John Coltrane’s tune “My Favorite Things”?
5. The morning newspaper mentioned that there might be “snow tonight with a chance of hail and strong
winds.”
6. His father asked him, “What would you like to do this summer, work or travel?”
7. As Patrick walked away, she hesitated and then screamed, “Will you go out with me?”
8. X (Book titles are italicized.)
9. We analyzed the play The Flies by Jean-Paul Sartre and his famous essay “Americans and Their Myths.”
(Titles of plays are italicized.)
10. The song “Organ Donor” is best qualified as “groundbreaking.”
11. The photographer encouraged the model by telling her, “You’re doing really well, but I want you to relax
a little more. When the camera is pointed at you, just imagine someone is saying to you, ‘You’re the only
one that can do this,’ and I want you to believe it!”
23·10 1. Eric could not figure out how to get out of the maze—how silly and useless he felt!
2. The touchdown scored by the Patriots was an 83-yard play.
3. They were once considered wishy-washy.
4. Carla was about to close the front door and thought to herself—do I have everything I need in the bag?
5. The tight-lipped receptionist told the reporters nothing.
6. She detests animal testing, so she never buys Yves Saint-Laurent products.
7. Thirty-two of the 52 figure skaters missed at least one of their jumps.
8. The Security Council voted against three crucial resolutions—an armed attack, a forced embargo, and
unified retaliation.
23·11 1. The Skibby Chronicle [published anonymously in the 1530s but now believed to be the work of Poul
Helgesen] describes Danish history from 1047 to 1534.
2. As members of the book club, we had to read The Stranger (Albert Camus [1913–1960]) and discuss the
novelist’s concept of the absurd.
3. According to historical accounts, the first bridge over the Chattahoochee River there [Columbus, Georgia]
was built by John Godwin in 1832–33.
4. They were told there was a heavy load of work that they would have to deal with during the semester:
They would have to (1) take two three-hour exams, (2) read 13 books, and (3) write a 50-page essay.
5. Thomas Hart Benton (1888–1975) finished his famous Indiana Murals in 1932.
6. Some scholars argue that Michelangelo (noted Italian painter and inventor [1475–1564]) was the
quintessential Renaissance man.
24 Capitalization, numbers, and italics

24·1 1. Teresa Malcolm is president of the Ford Rotary Club.
2. In three weeks, we will be traveling through France, Switzerland, and Spain.
3. The night sky was so clear we could see the entire moon, Venus, and Jupiter.
4. As soon as he got home, Patrick felt like putting on his new Adidas swimsuit.
5. The Second World War lasted nearly six years.
6. The novel we bought at the airport was The Da Vinci Code.
7. I visited the Empire State Building when I was in New York.
8. Thelma and John saw the launch of the USS Enterprise.
9. The NAACP is a prominent organization based in the United States.
10. They told her, “We don’t like the proposal you’ve written.”
24·2 1. Marilyn is the president of the Ladies of Grace at her church.
2. Some restaurants in Los Angeles serve Americanized European food.
3. Members of all faiths gathered on campus to protest, including Christians, Jews, Muslims, and Hindus.
4. “The Red Wheelbarrow” by William Carlos Williams is one of the most profound poems I’ve read.
234 Answer key

5. They came from the Eastern states in search of gold.
6. We read Of Mice and Men last week for class.
7. The CIA agent said he often works with FBI investigators, as well as with representatives of the FAA.
8. A speaker from the National Transportation Safety Board gave a presentation on the most common
accidents that took place on Interstate 66.
24·3 1. An important date to remember is November 17, 1959.
2. The city paid $34.7 million to build the tower.
3. It took five out of nine members to reach a consensus.
4. In Europe, the 1970s were marked by social and political change.
5. Turn to page 109, which should be chapter 12.
6. The morning temperature was 47 degrees Fahrenheit, or 8 degrees Celsius.
7. X
8. They drove down Interstate 34 to the lake.
9. The Second Battle of Bull Run was fought from August 28 to 30, 1862.
24·4 1. We installed Windows Vista on our desktop today.
2. Jason’s Spanish literature class read Miguel de Cervantes’ Don Quixote.
3. They reviewed the case of The People v. Robert Page Anderson for their law class.
4. He invited 10 of his closest friends, but more than 90 people showed up.
5. Did you get a copy of the Atlantic Monthly?
6. The lawyer working on Miller v. Wilson offered his services pro bono.
7. The Baton Rouge Advocate gave us information about visiting the Garden District.
8. The detective speculated about the criminal’s modus operandi.
Appendix Review exercises

A·1 1. have to
2. has to be able to
3. is able to
4. should be
5. had better
6. am going to have to
7. am going to
8. had better be able to
A·2 1. It is impossible to learn Arabic quickly.
2. Having eaten everything, we decided to go to a restaurant.
3. Paul finished working early today.
4. They have succeeded in becoming rich.
5. I am tired of working so hard just to make money.
6. They look forward to meeting you.
7. I am going to try to prevent you from drinking too much.
8. Shannon is interested in learning more about Artificial Intelligence.
9. To go willingly is to show courage.
10. They wanted to come earlier, but their flight was delayed.
11. Laura hopes to go (OR to be going) to Iceland next year, even if she knows it’s so cold there.
12. Are you enjoying yourself?
A·3 1. Have you met, have ever had
2. are you doing, am trying, is jamming, be putting or put, will probably hurt
3. is sitting, see, certainly looks
4. is, was running, came, fell, don’t, Are, were, seems, be suffering
5. Are you taking, am not, Have you ever taken, have, did you take, taught or was teaching, am taking,
Is, was taking or took, was, was
6. spent, had never been, did you do, drove, thought
7. has been, rained, dropped, is, was shining, changes, knows, am, will have frozen
8. went, Was it, didn’t, enjoyed, did you see, had never seen, saw, went, thought, was, didn’t
Answer key 235

A·4 1. is [going]
2. should [open]
3. is [going]
4. don’t have to [paint]
5. Are supposed to [get]
6. should have to [pay]
7. is going to [open]
8. have been [running]
9. should be able to [stay]
10. has been [playing]
A·5 1. stay
2. be painted
3. take
4. be moved
5. eat
6. be cancelled
7. be
8. be taught, be tested
9. be allowed
10. not be
11. practice
12. not be allowed
13. be
14. meet
15. be read to
A·6 1. Kenji has been studying Portuguese. or Kenji is studying Portuguese.
2. Juan has lived in Madrid for two years.
3. He has to come back to meet us here.
4. My father, Raoul, who studied mathematics with my uncle, is looking for a job.
5. After work, Anjali will be going to the pub. or After work, Anjali will go to the pub.
6. Last week, Mark was able to visit the president’s office.
7. The soil is dry. They will not be able to plant vegetables there.
8. He doesn’t like his neighbors, because they’re too noisy.
9. They didn’t have any problems with the rental car.
10. I have been learning a lot since I began doing my exercises.
11. Are you thinking of buying another car soon?
12. She was visiting many monuments when she was in Rome. or She visited many monuments when she
was in Rome.
13. I didn’t see a single beautiful sunset.
14. He couldn’t forget her after the love affair.
15. He is always attempting to catch the students cheating. or He was always attempting to catch the students
cheating.
16. Sometimes when I cross the street, I don’t look to see if a car is coming.
17. I’ve been thinking about it for a long time now. or I’ve thought about it for a long time now.
18. I feel my English grammar might be improving. or I feel my English grammar might improve.
19. Mrs. Gilmore was sad, because her son had to go back to the front lines.
20. All my friends can help me become a better person.
A·7 1. painters
2. classes
3. X
4. laws
5. workers
6. societies
7. customs
236 Answer key

A·8 1. Hello there. How are you? OR Hello, how are you?
2. It’s such a nice city to visit. There are so many things to do.
3. X
4. Some will study in Germany; others, instead, will study somewhere else in Europe.
5. I am in love with you and want us to stay together. Wherever you go, I will follow you.
6. I am not sure of what is wrong with Nancy, but something is bothering her.
7. X
8. It won’t be a party just for friends. Anybody who wants to come is welcome.
9. It’s unlikely the train will leave on time. Many of the passengers know that.
10. Some work in the evenings, but many (OR most) work in the daytime.
11. X
12. I asked Peter where they were going this summer and he told me they are traveling to Paris. It seems like
everyone is visiting France this year.
13. I’m sorry, no one speaks Mandarin here.
14. Karen doesn’t like going out with Eric. He generally drinks quite a lot.
A·9 1. behind 15. in
2. beneath 16. like
3. for 17. on
4. among OR with 18. below OR above
5. after OR for 19. on
6. on 20. near
7. in 21. from
8. on 22. of
9. on 23. about OR around
10. on 24. across OR around
11. from 25. before
12. in 26. along
13. from 27. around OR at
14. in 28. in
A·10 1. be 5. have
2. be or have been 6. did
3. have 7. have
4. had 8. is
A·11 Answers may vary.
1. This is a sentence fragment or a dependent clause: Teaching math to smart students is interesting.
or I love teaching math to smart students.
2. X (Listen! is an imperative.)
3. This is a sentence fragment or a dependent clause: If you want to observe what is taking place, you should
stand up.
4. X
5. This is a sentence fragment: The European Union is composed of many different countries.
6. This sentence needs a period at the end: I already ran three miles.
7. The first word of this sentence needs to begin with a capital letter: Before I walked in, I rang the bell,
hoping someone would open the door.
8. This is a sentence fragment: There are many different photographs in that dusty, black book.
9. This is a sentence fragment: Peter has many children.
10. X (Open is an imperative.)
11. X
12. X
13. The main clause of this sentence is missing a subject: If your friend is a lawyer, he doesn’t have to worry
about finding a job.
14. This sentence has redundant subjects: Madrid is the capital of Spain. or It is the capital of Spain.
15. This sentence is missing a verb: Also, he is very smart, quiet, and polite.
A·12 1. (b) 5. (b)
2. (c) 6. (c)
3. (a) 7. (b)
4. (a)
Answer key 237

1. When I was younger, I thought the earth was flat.
2. X
3. My favorite color was red, because it reminded me of my sister.
4. He hates horror movies because he gets scared immediately.
5. X
6. She is back: It’s the end of spring semester at UCLA.
7. To paint this wall, you need a special brush.
8. Elvis is over there with Tupac and Biggie, and they look happy.
9. You will get a free subscription. In addition, you will receive a free towel, a matching bathrobe, a sticker,
and a silver pen.
10. Once you have done all your stretching, run for two miles or so.
11. X
12. When the water is boiling, put the pasta in the pot.
13. After the sun comes up, we can begin hiking up the mountain.
A·14 1. when
2. Although OR Even though OR Though
3. before
4. If
5. because
6. nor
7. but
8. or OR and
10. so
11. and
12. as
13. as
14. after
A·15 1. be promoted
2. give
3. knock
4. be
5. have
6. be studied, (be) stopped
7. be allowed
8. be postponed
9. remain
10. be named
11. take
12. write
13. meet
14. talk
15. join
16. be
17. be admitted
18. not be
19. return
20. not tell
A·16 1. Hasn’t he fixed the garage door?
2. Doesn’t John get her sense of humor?
3. Don’t British people say that?
4. Hasn’t she spoken to the doctor?
5. Haven’t you done it?
238 Answer key

A·17 1. The private and public sectors in Africa need to work closely together.
2. It is undeniable that armed conflict makes things worse.
3. They sit on the bench and feel that the judge condemns them for no apparent reason.
4. Many families in this area who don’t own houses feel that they should get interest-free loans.
A·18 1. is worn
2. was invented
3. spelled
4. will be built
5. is scheduled
6. was confused
7. were frightened
8. was offered
9. was expected
10. was reported
11. was killed or had been killed
12. was ordered
13. was caused
14. will be divided
A·19 1. When we get older, we can do a lot of things.
2. Pedro ate a few pieces of cheese with his enchilada.
3. He read some books at the public library before they closed.
4. Last year, I gave him Star Wars and Indiana Jones for Christmas, but I don’t know if he ever watched
those movies.
5. There are too many people in this car.
6. My little sister is only three years old, but she seems older.
7. We had not been to Portugal in six years.
8. X
9. If you want to form your own opinion, you should read many news articles and watch many kinds
of documentaries.
10. In addition to the art gallery, there are a lot of beautiful places to visit.
A·20 1. whose 12. who
2. oneself 13. that
3. itself 14. each other
4. herself 15. herself
5. whose 16. that
6. that 17. who
7. which 18. what
8. who 19. yourself
9. ourselves 20. What
10. themselves 21. whom
11. myself 22. which
A·21 1. She will be going to Dallas to visit her brother.
2. Patrick has known me since I was six years old.
3. He has been living in Lisbon for years, but we still keep in touch via e-mail.
4. When I get to Peter’s house, he will have to open the front door.
5. I soon noticed that Paul didn’t drive very well. Among other things, he didn’t respect the speed limit
on the highways.
6. Paul knows that he should be taking driving classes.
7. If he were to move back home, he could help his mom more and he could take care of her on a daily basis.
8. Vanessa should do her shopping at Trader Joe’s.
9. I am taking the GRE next month, and I am quite nervous.
A·22 1. had left
2. had just finished
3. had already done
4. had already cleaned
5. was
Answer key 239

A·23 1. In terms of transportation, cars are a basic part of modern life.
2. The automobile has made it possible for people to travel many miles from their homes.
3. X
4. Students study more than they used to and learn about more things than they used to.
5. Life expectancy is much greater than it was a hundred years ago.
A·24 1. She is having so much fun at the live show but still thinks the ticket was too expensive.
2. It’s going to storm tonight, so it’s likely the heavy rain will make driving more difficult.
3. Many people who don’t vote during the recent elections now feel that they should have taken the time to
do it.
4. It is definitely her grandma’s secret ingredient that makes that cake taste so good.
5. In case of an emergency landing, the airline crew and the passengers on the airplane need to remain calm.
6. She waits in line at the grocery store and wishes it would go faster.
A·25 1. (e) 4. (a)
2. (b) 5. (d)
3. (c)
A·26 1. The ten districts in this city have decided to build more modern-looking buildings.
2. Some cities in Argentina surprise tourists with their architecture.
3. Often, the term “third-world country” makes people think of crime and poverty.
4. X
5. The graduate courses are very difficult; you feel like everyone else understands and you don’t.
6. Study a lot, and you will get many of the answers right.
7. If a student doesn’t understand the answer to his or her question, he or she should feel comfortable
enough to ask again.
8. All students have to take the two parts of the exam.
9. These drills cannot prove the ability of the nurses, because the nurses simply execute certain emergency
procedures.
10. There are two kinds of people in this company: honest people and greedy people.
11. There are many problems at my office, but one problem is the lack of motivation.
12. Any person whose parents are seriously sick worries about their health.
13. You can find many kinds of people working in our office.
14. Italian ice cream is so delicious. I’m pretty sure you’ll like it.
15. When I first came to this hotel, I didn’t like the food, but now I like it very much.
16. That was the first time I bought my own furniture. I enjoyed picking it out, and I felt like an adult.
17. The people who share my apartment are friendly, but they’re messy.
18. There are six freshly planted trees on my street.
19. If you drive when you’re too tired, you might cause an accident.
20. I left my wallet and my keys on the counter. When I came back, I couldn’t find them anymore.
21. Everyone wants to be successful and be in good health.
22. Count the money again before you put it in the envelope.
23. Every person should help improve his or her neighborhood.
A·27 1. be driven
2. was built, began, was completed
3. was bothered
4. will be divided
5. be baked
6. had been fired OR were fired
7. was designed
8. was caused
9. was offered, decided

A·28 1. I had not seen my best friend in over twenty years.
2. There are not enough people to play this game.
3. X
4. When you’re off work, you are able to accomplish more personal tasks.
5. This record player was made thirty years ago, but it still works perfectly.
6. X
7. If Pierre wants to learn how to cook, he should try out many recipes and try different types of food.
8. Henry added a few spoons of sugar to his cup of tea.
9. This is not the only beautiful building in Madrid; there are many other architectural landmarks across the
city.
10. He rented some movies at the video store before they closed for the day.
A·29 1. with 5. to
2. to 6. with
3. about 7. to
4. in
A·30 1. X
2. Christine enjoys walking along the river. She likes that it’s so peaceful.
3. My boyfriend’s mother is an attorney. She works for important people.
4. X
5. He needed a coffee table and a couch, but he decided he could live without them.
6. My cousins are all younger than I, but they are taller than I am.
7. Japan is a small country. It has a long history.
8. Many people in the world are learning English. These people want to improve their language skills and
get better jobs.
9. If the tourists go to Puerto Rico, they should visit Old San Juan. They ought to try the food, too,
because it’s delicious.
10. All his ideas come from dreams, and he tries to make these dreams reality.
11. Mrs. Hutchinson put her jacket back on.
A·31 1. (j) 6. (f)
2. (i) 7. (a
3. (h) 8. (b)
4. (g) 9. (c)
5. (d) 10. (e)
A·32 1. This government has been run by Cardinal Richelieu since 1626.
2. I’m quite excited to see her again.
3. I am so happy. Finally, I passed the exam.
4. They’re not sure if the problem will be worked out by tomorrow.
5. I’m interested in advanced technology.
6. The other colors have to be changed.
7. We need to love someone and be loved.
8. This question can be decided by taking into account all the information we’ve gathered.
9. I like the people there, because they’re very educated.
10. I like the way math is taught in her class.
11. This store is located on the third floor of the mall.
A·33 1. was offered
2. was held up, took
3. is spent
4. was not admitted, had already begun
5. were working, occurred
6. generally delivers
7. will be used
8. was studying, is finally getting or has been studying, has finally gotten
9. are being sold
10. will never be forgotten
11. arrive, will be met, will be wearing, will be standing
12. has been or was, lost, dropped, was walking, broke, was stolen
Answer key 241

A·34 1. As soon as she started walking in her new shoes, she realized that they weren’t very comfortable. The
problem is that she had bought them on sale, so she couldn’t return or exchange them.
2. Susan was upset that her grades were so low. She knows that she should be studying more often.
3. It was so windy and rainy this morning. When I get home, I will have to close the windows and make sure
the floor and furniture are still dry.
4. Matt has moved to Iceland, but we still speak on the phone every other week. We also try to see each other
twice a year. I still miss him very much.
5. Charles and I have been friends since we were children. I met him in kindergarten, and a few years later
his family moved to our neighborhood.
6. He’s having minor surgery next month and is worried about it.
7. Sebastien should have his hair done at my local hairdresser; I’m sure he would like the place and the
service.
8. The first time Jessica went to the pool with her son Mark, she noticed that he couldn’t swim very well.
9. They are leaving their daughter Cara with a babysitter for the first time since she was born. I hope it goes
well, because if not, they will never leave the house again.
A·35 1. is produced
2. saw, was interviewed
3. are controlled, are determined
4. blew, cost
5. is being treated
6. is exposed, affects
7. was poisoned
8. is supported
9. was told
10. will probably be lost
11. were sent
12. will be developed, have already been tested
A·36 1. Elizabeth got back into her car; she was not looking forward to the long drive back home.
2. The Chicago Bulls is a great team. It has won many championships.
3. Most of Susy’s neighbors are richer than she is, but they are more selfish than she is.
4. X
5. If his family decides to purchase that house, they should make sure to carefully inspect it first. They
should have the plumbing checked as well, because it’ll cost a lot of money to repair.
6. Most of their money comes from their investments, but the stock market has been unreliable.
7. Pierre generally can’t begin his days without a coffee and a croissant. Today he was running late for work
so he thought it would be best to skip them.
8. Samantha decided to buy a Tesla car, but they told her she’d have to wait for six months.
9. Pedro’s sister is a professional tennis player. She’s won many tournaments and travelled to many countries.
10. X
11. Greg really enjoys running in the park early in the morning. He finds it peaceful, enjoys the it’s clean, and
often sees fish swimming (OR swim) in the pond.
A·37 1. are meant to [get]
2. should have to [make]
3. are planning to [release]
4. has been [eating]
5. is going to [cancel]
6. doesn’t have to [finish]
7. is going to [buy]
8. is going to [get]
9. has been [marinating]
10. should be able to [open]
11. should have to [pay]
242 Answer key

A·38 1. He was so thrilled to get to see her again.
2. Tyler is interested in trying out yoga.
3. She was so proud. At last, her son had passed his driving test.
4. The way we live has to change if we want to reduce global warming.
5. The library is located inside the main building on campus.
6. The chess club has been managed by students since 1984.
7. We need to respect others and be respected.
8. The decision can be overruled only if there isn’t a majority.
9. They appreciate their neighbors, because they are kind, not too noisy, and well mannered.
A·39 1. wasn’t boarded, had already closed
2. is offering
3. was practicing, is definitely improving, OR has been practicing, has definitely improved
4. had been picked up
5. crying, lost
6. was asked
A·40 1. She must have been playing The Beatles. Who else could it have been?
2. He may be napping, so do not bother him.
3. They should have gone to the supermarket with you.
4. You may not do that.
5. We must have water in order to survive.
6. Paul told me last week that they had not gone to the gym last month.
7. They won’t come till much later.
8. Long may they live!
9. May Margaret come in?
10. If Shawn and Mary could help, they would.
11. I could run faster when I was younger.
12. May OR Can OR Might they be excused?
13. She can do it too.
A·41 1. was OR has been, has taken
2. has been snowing, froze, hasn’t been, has been OR was sunny, spending
3. went, forgot, Is it OR Will it be
4. spent, I hadn’t been, not realizing
5. fell, has been resting OR was resting, scraped, have been, was wearing, was sleeping
A·42 1. This team formation is not working. The players have to be switched out and replaced.
2. Becky was tired from a long day of work but when her husband arrived home, they decided to go out
anyways.
3. Honestly, I’m not sure if the package will be delivered by next week. Maybe I should have chosen a faster
shipping option.
4. They went to play outside, even though it was rather cold. Rachel, his mother, was glad they did because
she needed to clean up the living room.
5. Our volunteers are dedicated to saving animals when they have been abandoned. They try their best to
keep them safe and fed until they’re eventually adopted.
6. Carla appreciates the way Paul is helping her with the suitcases. They’re actually not that heavy, she just
enjoys that he is being a gentleman.
7. I can’t believe you forgot the keys on the counter and slammed the door shut. Ah, why did you do that?
8. Sophie is feeling so proud. At last, she received a raise at work, and next month she is being promoted to a
managerial position.
9. Staying calm is important; shouting is not. People tend to be more receptive to kindness. No one likes
being screamed at.
10. Bill is fascinated by the sharks at the aquarium. The way they move back and forth in the water tank is
hypnotizing.
11. They’ve been looking for her all over the place. She’s here, isn’t she?
12. Frank’s issue can only be resolved once he has taken all of the elements into consideration.
13. I must complete this form before the counter closes in half an hour. Give me that pen right away!
14. That restaurant’s apple pie is so amazing. They guarantee you’ll want some more!
15. “Please stay on the line”, she said. This was his third time calling customer service and they kept putting
him hold.
Answer key 243

1. To wash this stain, you’ll need a powerful detergent.
2. Shawn is playing over there with his two cousins, and they are having fun.
3. After we wake up in the morning, we can meet them for breakfast.
4. Once your name is called, step up to the window and pick up your order.
5. Patricia will get a monthly gym membership. In addition to the classes, she will have access to the pool,
the sauna, their tanning salon, and the Zumba classes.
6. X
7. They are leaving tomorrow: it’s the beginning of their summer break.
8. Lucy doesn’t like drawing because she claims she has no talent for it.
9. X
10. When I was living in New York, I assumed it was the greatest city in the world.
11. His favorite cartoon was The Smurfs, because it reminded him of his childhood.
12. X
A·44 1. You will notice many kinds of students attending our English classes.
2. There are many ways of writing it, but the right way is the best way.
3. All airplane pilots have to score high points on the two sections of the flight simulation.
4. There are two kinds of chocolates in this cake: white chocolate and milk chocolate.
5. Eight out of ten engineers have confirmed that the bridge is safe to use.
6. A couple of magicians in the show startled the audience with their tricks.
7. X
8. Mathematics is a confusing class to me; it seems like most students do well on the quizzes, but I don’t.
9. In my experience, using the dictionary as often as possible gives students the opportunity to learn new
words.
10. There are three kinds of people in this world: good people, bad people, and people who don’t care.
11. The DJ was playing four newly released songs on the radio this morning.
12. The movies Wes Anderson makes are so fun to watch, he’s a great director. I’m guessing you’ll really like
his work.
13. If Shauna and Coy sleep on their international flight, they might feel less tired the next day.
14. French cuisine is so simple and minimal, yet the flavors are often so rich and complex.
15. Everyone who cares about their country should vote.
16. Weigh the flour and the sugar again before you mix them in with the eggs.
17. The three new employees share the office that is in the corner.
18. She forgot her umbrella and her hat in the taxi. She called the taxi company later that afternoon; can you
believe they found them?!
19. Most people wish to live a long and happy life.
20. At first, I didn’t like going to the opera, but now I appreciate it a lot more.
1. This is a sentence fragment: The World Cup was won by France this year.
2. X
3. This sentence has redundant subjects: Edmond Dantès is the hero of the novel The Count of Montecristo.
OR He is the hero of the novel The Count of Montecristo.
4. This is a sentence fragment or a dependent clause: If she wants to feel rested, she should go to bed earlier.
OR If she wants to be rested, she should maybe buy a more comfortable bed.
5. X (Close is an imperative.)
6. This is a sentence fragment or a dependent clause: Helping children to share can be difficult, but it is
important. OR Part of being a good parent is helping children to share.
7. X
8. This sentence needs a question mark at the end: Have they already fixed all these problems?
9. The first word of this sentence needs to begin with a capital letter: After they were done eating, they cleaned
up the kitchen.
10. This is a sentence fragment: There are different fun rides in that loud, crowded amusement park.
11. This sentence is missing two verbs: Not only is she kind, she is also very generous.
12. X
13. The main clause of this sentence is missing a subject: If you’re not lying, you don’t have to be worried.
14. X (Pay attention is an imperative.)
244 Answer key

Study Vocabulary, Grammar Concepts,
Verbs, and Sentence Structures with
McGraw-Hill Education Language Lab App
Select Your
Title and Chapter
•
Study Hundreds
of Exercises
for Learning
On-the-Go
•
Build Your
Understanding
•
Track Your Progress
•
Customize
Your Study
FREE with these English titles
All titles are available as print and ebook
Available free from the Apple and Google Play app stores
Put Your English Language into Practice!
At busuu, you can practice your English skills through graded courses and a broad range
of engaging activities. And as you study, busuu encourages direct interaction with native
speakers through video and audio chat.
With busuu, you can:
• Practice with exercises that hone all four skills (reading, writing, speaking, listening).
• Enjoy flexible language learning—anytime, anywhere—to fit into your busy schedule.
• Receive personalized feedback on your exercises, talk with native speakers via an
integrated chat, and get to know people from all over the world.
With over 55 million registered users, busuu is the largest social network for
language learning in the world!
Special Offer: 30% off Premium membership

McGraw-Hill Education has partnered with busuu to provide an
exclusive discount on busuu’s award-winning Premium service.
Discount: 30% off any plan

Access code: BUSUUENG30
Code expiry date: December 31, 2019
Or Try A New Language!

busuu offers courses in eleven other languages, specially designed by educational experts. With programs
ranging from Beginning to Upper Intermediate, you’ll quickly find the level that works for you!
Sign up or log in on www.busuu.com and enter your discount code

on the payment page to get your exclusive discount!

(Practice Makes Perfect) Robin Torres-Gouzerh - Practice Makes Perfect - Intermediate English Grammar For ESL Learners-McGraw-Hill Education (2019) PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

(Practice Makes Perfect) Robin Torres-Gouzerh - Practice Makes Perfect - Intermediate English Grammar For ESL Learners-McGraw-Hill Education (2019) PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

PRACTICE

00_FM.indd 1 2/8/19 9:51 AM

00_FM.indd 2 2/8/19 9:51 AM

New York Chicago San Francisco Athens London Madrid

00_FM.indd 3 2/8/19 9:51 AM

eBook conversion by codeMantra

Extra Exercise Questions

2 The verb phrase 5

4 The progressive tenses 14

5 The perfect tenses 20

7 The progressive forms of modal auxiliaries 43

8 The auxiliary verb do 48

00_FM.indd 5 2/8/19 9:51 AM

10 The passive form of modal auxiliaries 58

11 The stative passive 61

12 Past participles with get 67

15 Agreement with nouns 84

00_FM.indd 6 2/8/19 9:51 AM

20 Adjectives and adverbs 115

21 Filler subjects and impersonal subjects 120

24 Capitalization, numbers, and italics 162

appendix Review exercises 170

00_FM.indd 7 2/8/19 9:51 AM

00_FM.indd 8 2/8/19 9:51 AM

00_FM.indd 9 2/8/19 9:51 AM

00_FM.indd 10 2/8/19 9:51 AM

EXAMPLE Is a real bargain. That coat is a real bargain.

1. Were eating an Italian specialty.

2. Have worked in Austin for two years.

3. Purchased it last week.

01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 1 2/25/08 10:56:01 AM

1. Children ought to be more careful.

2 practice makes perfect Intermediate English Grammar for ESL Learners

01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 2 2/25/08 10:56:02 AM

1. The big, brown dog sitting in the shade is hungry.

unit 1 The sentence 3

01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 3 2/25/08 10:56:02 AM

EXAMPLE They stayed up and chatted until dawn .

1. he headed for home on foot.

4 practice makes perfect Intermediate English Grammar for ESL Learners

01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 4 2/25/08 10:56:02 AM

It is impossible to compose a correct sentence without using a proper verb. The

1. He doesn’t go to meetings on Tuesdays.

01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 5 2/25/08 10:56:02 AM

6 practice makes perfect Intermediate English Grammar for ESL Learners

01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 6 2/25/08 10:56:03 AM

1. He does attend meetings on Tuesdays.

EXAMPLE They speak with a lawyer.

1. James tries on a pair of pants.

2. I live on about a hundred dollars a week.

3. Father scolds the children.

unit 2 The verb phrase 7

01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 7 2/25/08 10:56:03 AM

5. The conductor waits on the platform.

8 practice makes perfect Intermediate English Grammar for ESL Learners

01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 8 2/25/08 10:56:03 AM

01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 9 2/25/08 10:56:03 AM

1. Her suggestion useful at the time.

Most verbs have five forms:

10 practice makes perfect Intermediate English Grammar for ESL Learners

01 (1-32) ch 1-5.indd 10 2/25/08 10:56:04 AM

cut cuts cut cutting cut

unit 3 The verb 11